Catalog

CONNECTING COMPETENCE.
ALEA
W POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W MODULAR CONTACTORS
w MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
w THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
W MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES UP TO 100A
ENERGY INDUSTRY BUILDINGS SAFETY DATA CABLE LIGHT

GENERAL INFORMATION
W WELCOME TO SCHRACK TECHNIK
We are a leading, sales-oriented brand company from Austria specialising in the areas of energy, data and lighting systems.
Our activities focus on products and solutions for energy optimisation, safety, data transfer and comfort. High-quality
products, technical expertise and one-to-one customer service are at the fore of what we do.
W SCHRACK PRODUCT QUALITY

We offer our customers a well sorted product range offering the highest levels of product availability. Our aim is ultra-
efficiency when it comes to customerspecific solutions. This is possible thanks to standardized work processes, modularisation
and the use of software aids.
W SCHRACK ISO-CERTIFIZIED
In recent times, testing procedures for ISO certification have shifted their focus very strongly on how organisations deal with
customers, and the associated customer processes. Some of the major areas which are inspected include:
• General customer communication
• Dealing with offers and tenders in a structured manner
• Transparency in all areas of the company in direct or indirect contact with customers
• The above is required in all tiers of management
ISO certification is by no means the norm. Our ISO certification 9001:2000 is both a reward as well as an obligation. The
obligation we have in accepting this certification is to ensure the documentation of our work processes and to continuously
improve such processes.
W GENERAL INFORMATION
• All dimensioned drawings are displayed within the confines of available space on the page and are only intended as a guide.
• All circuit diagrams are schematic wiring diagrams which are intended to allow better understanding of the function, and
will need to be edited/added to during the course of project planning.
• All images represent samples of the product and are intended for information purposes only.
Unless otherwise stipulated, the current version of the General Terms of Delivery issued by The Association of the Austrian Electrical
and Electronics Industries “FEEI” shall apply. No liability for errors in text, type or images; we reserve the right to make changes to techni-
cal specifications of the product range. The user information contained in this catalog reflect the opinion of the company at the time
of writing. The information contained in it was assembled on the basis of published norms, specialist industry presentations, specia-
list literature and in-house expertise. The content is for informational purposes only and has no validity in law.
Schu?tzkatalog_engl_Teil1_neu_AK6:KAPITEL_01 16.03.2009 13:51 Uhr Seite 1
INDEX
w ALEA POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................. Page 4
GENERAL INFORMATIONS ............................................................................................ Page 13
Page
PRODUCTS AND ORDER NUMBERS ................................................................................ Page 18
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ Page 33
1
DIMENSIONS .............................................................................................................. Page 100
SCHEMATICS ................................................................................................................ Page 112
w BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS
DIMENSIONS .............................................................................................................. Page 129
SCHEMATICS ................................................................................................................ Page 130
w LA MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

DIMENSIONS .............................................................................................................. Page 139
SCHEMATICS ................................................................................................................ Page 140
w ALEA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS

OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................. Page 144
ACCESSORIES .............................................................................................................. Page 156
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES ............................................................................................ Page 157
DIMENSIONS .............................................................................................................. Page 158
SCHEMATICS ................................................................................................................ Page 159
w LA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS

DIMENSIONS .............................................................................................................. Page 166
SCHEMATICS ................................................................................................................ Page 167
w ALEA MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES UP TO 100A

OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................. Page 170
ACCESSORIES .............................................................................................................. Page 188
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES ............................................................................................ Page 190
DIMENSIONS .............................................................................................................. Page 191
SCHEMATICS ................................................................................................................ Page 195
w INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX .................................................................................................. Page 196
LIST OF ARTICLES .......................................................................................................... Page 198
ALEA POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
TOP-TECHNIC TOP-TECHNIC
Page
LSHD / LSHD-PLC LSDD / LSSD-PLC
LSD0 / LSS0-PLC LSD2 / LSD3 / LSD6
LSDE / LSDG LSDH

ALEA POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
Page
ALEA POWER AND

AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
w CONTENTS
OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................. Page 4
GENERAL INFORMATIONS ............................................................................ Page 13
PRODUCTS AND ORDER NUMBERS ........................................................ Page 18
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................... Page 33
DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 100
SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 112

POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
W CONTACTORS AND CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 3-POLE – OVERVIEW
Page
LSHD / LSHD-PLC 1) LSDD / LSSD-PLC 1) LSD0 / LSS0-PLC LSD2
SIZE 00 00 0 2
TYPE LSHD LSDD / LSSD 1) LSD0 / LSS0 LSD2
CONTACTORS AND VACUUM CONTACTORS
TYPE / AC, DC OPERATION 06 07 09 12 09 12 17 25 32 40 50
AC-3
Ie/AC-3/400 V 6A 7A 9A 12A 9A 12A 17A 25A 32A 40A 50A
400 V 3A 3kW 4kW 5.5kW 4kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW 18.5kW 22kW
230 V -- 2.2kW 3kW 3kW 3kW 3kW 4kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW
500 V 2A 3.5kW 4.5kW 5.5kW 4.5kW 7.5kW 10kW 11kW 18.5kW 22kW 30kW
690 V 1A 4kW 5.5kW 5.5kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 11kW 18.5kW 22kW 22kW
1 000 V -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
AC-4 (FOR IA = 6 X IE)
400 V -- 3kW 4kW 4kW 4kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 7.5kW 15kW 18.5kW 22kW
400 V (200 000 operating cycles) -- 1.15kW 2kW 2kW 2kW 2.6kW 3.5kW 4.4kW 8.2kW 9.5kW 12.6kW
AC-1 (40 °C, ≤ 690 V)
Ie 10A 18A 22A 22A 40A 40A 40A 40A 50A 60A 60A
ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS
AUXILIARY CONTACTS front LSZDH.. LSZDH.../LSZDD.../LSZD0 LSZ0D... LSZ0D...
AND CONTACT BLOCKS LSZD0..
lateral -- -- LSZ0D7.., LSZ0D9.. LSZ0D7.., LSZ0D9..
TERMINAL COVERS -- -- -- LSZ2D...
SURGE SUPPRESSORS LSZH0... LSZD.... LSZ0.... LSZ2D....
OVERLOAD RELAYS (PROTECTION EQUIPMENT: OVERLOAD RELAYS)
LST, thermal, Class 10 -- LSTD.... 0.1 ... 12 A LST0.... 2.5 ... 25 A LST2.... 10 ... 50 A
MOTOR STARTER PROTECTORS (PROTECTION EQUIPMENT: MOTOR STARTER PROTECTORS)

TYPE BES -- BESD 0.16 ... 12 A Size 00 BES0 0.16 ... 25 A BES2 25 ... 50 A
BES0 0.16 ... 12 A Size 0
LINK MODULES LSZ -- LSZDD005, LSZDD006 LSZ0D002 (AC), LSZ0D004 (DC) LSZ2D004 (AC), LSZ2D005 (DC)
REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
COMPLETE UNITS TYPE LSW -- LSWD07.. LSWD09.. LSWD12.. -- LSW012.. LSW017.. LSW025.. LSW232.. LSW240.. LSW250..
400 V -- 3kW 4kW 5.5kW -- 5.5kW 7.5kW 12kW 15kW 18.5kW 22kW
WIRING SETS -- LSZDW001 LSZDW001 LSZ2W001
MECHANICAL INTERLOCKS -- in wiring set included LSZ0W002 LSZ0W002
CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES FOR WYE-DELTA STARTING
COMPLETE UNITS TYPE LSY -- LSYD17.. LSY032.. LSY25033
400 V -- 7.5kW 15kW 22kW
WIRING SETS -- LSZDW001 LSZ0Y001 LSZ2Y003
1) no auxillary contacts for PLC-use types possible

W CONTACTORS AND CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 3-POLE – OVERVIEW
Page
LSD3 LSD6 LSDE LSDG LSDH
3 6 10 12 14
LSD3 LSD6 LSDE LSDG LSDH
65 80 95 11 15 2) 19 2) 22 26 30 41 51 63/64 82/83
65A 80A 95A 115A 150A 185A 225A 265A 300A 400A 500A 630A 820A
30kW 37kW 45kW 55kW 75kW 90kW 110kW 132kW 160kW 200kW 250kW 335kW 450kW
18.5kW 22kW 22kW 37kW 45kW 55kW 55kW 75kW 90kW 132kW 160kW 200kW 260kW
45kW 55kW 55kW 110kW 132kW 160kW 200kW 250kW 250kW 400kW 400/500kW 600kW 800kW
30kW 37kW 37kW 75kW 90kW 90kW 90/315kW 132/355kW 132/400kW 250/560kW 250/710kW 600kW 800kW
15.1kW 17.9kW 22kW 29kW 38kW 45kW 54/78kW 66/93kW 71/112kW 84/140kW 98/161kW 168kW 191kW
100A 120A 120A 160A 185A 215A 275/330A 330A 330A 430/610A 610A 700A 910A
LSZ0D... LSZ0D... LSZ0D... LSZ0D... --
LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.., LSZ0D9.. LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.., LSZ0D9.. LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.., LSZ0D9.. LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.., LSZ0D9.. --
LSZ3D... LSZ6D... LSZED... LSZED... LSZHD...
LSZ2.... LSZ6.... LSZ6.... LSZ6.... included
LST3 25 ... 100 A -- -- -- --
BES3 63 ... 100 A -- -- -- --
LSZ3D004 (AC), LSZ3D003 (DC)
LSW365.. LSW380.. LSW395.. -- -- -- --

30kW 37kW 45kW -- -- -- --
LSZ3W001 LSZ6W002 LSZEW001 LSZGW001 --
LSZ0W002 LSZ6W001 LSZ6W001 LSZ6W001 --
-- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- --
2) without box-terminals
W LSDD CONTACTORS, LSSD CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE AND

LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW
Page W SIZE 00 WITH MOUNTABLE ACCESSORIES
6 The ALEA generation of controls is a complete, modular system family, logically designed right down to the last detail, from
the basic units to the accessories.
1. Contactor LSDD For contactors LSDD

2. Contactor LSSD and auxiliary contactors LSHD For LSSD contactors for PLC-use and
8. 1-pole auxiliary contact block, cable entry from below LSHD auxiliary contactors
10. 4-pole auxiliary contact block (terminal designations
according to EN 50005 and EN 50012)
13. Solder pin adapter for contactors and auxiliary contactors
16. Surge suppressor
17. 3-phase feeder terminal
18. Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, without terminal
19. Link for paralleling, 3-pole, with terminal
20. Link for paralleling, 4-pole, with terminal
W LSD0, LSD2, LSD3 AND LSS0 CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE – OVERVIEW
W SIZES 0 TO 3 WITH MOUNTABLE ACCESSORIES Page
For sizes 0 to 3: Only for sizes 2 and 3:

1. Contactor, size 0 22. Terminal cover for box terminals
2. Contactor, size 2
3. Contactor, size 3 Only for size 3:
9. 4-pole auxiliary contact block (terminal designations 23. Terminal cover for cable lugs and busbar connections
according to EN 50005 and EN 50012) 24. Auxiliary conductor terminal, 3-pole
10. Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, without
connection terminal Accessories identical for sizes 0 to 3
11. Link for paralleling, 3-pole, with terminal Accessories different according to size
12. 2-pole auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable left or
right (terminal designations according to EN 50012)
13. Single-pole auxiliary contact (up to 4 can be snapped on)
14. Mechanical interlock, laterally mountable
16. Wiring modules on the top and bottom (reversing duty)
17. Surge suppressor (varistor, RC element, diode assembly),
can be mounted on the top or bottom (different for
size 0, 2 and 3)
W LSD6, LSDE AND LSDG CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW
Page W SIZES 6 TO 12 WITH ACCESSORIES

8
1. LSD6, LSDE, LSDG contactors, sizes 6, 10 and 12 Accessories identical for sizes 0 to 12
3. 4-pole auxiliary contact block (terminal designations Accessories identical for sizes 6 to 12
according to EN 50005 and EN 50012)
6. Single-pole auxiliary contact (up to 4 can be snapped on) Accessories different according to size
7. 2-pole auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable left or
right (terminal designations according to EN 50012)
(identical for sizes 0 to 12)
8. Surge suppressor (RC element), for plugging into top of
withdrawable coil
9. Terminal cover for cable lug and busbar connection,
different for sizes 6, 10 and 12
10. Terminal cover for box terminal, different for sizes 6, 10
and 12
11. Box terminal block, different for sizes 6, 10 and 12
W LSD CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW
W LSW CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES, LSD CONTACTORS SIZE 6 WITH ACCESSORIES Page
1. LSD contactors, size 6 Accessories identical for sizes 6 to 12

2. Mechanical interlock, laterally mountable Accessories different according to size
3. Wiring modules on the top and bottom
4. Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, with through
hole
and 12
7. Box terminal block, different for sizes 6, 10 and 12
W LSDE AND LSDG CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW
Page W LSW CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES, LSD CONTACTORS SIZE 10 AND 12 WITH ACCESSORIES
10
1. LSD contactors, sizes 10 and 12 or LSD Accessories identical for sizes 6 to 12

2. Mechanical interlock, laterally mountable Accessories different according to size
3. Wiring modules on the top and bottom
4. Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, with through
hole
and 12
W LSD CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW
W LSD CONTACTORS SIZES 6 TO 12 WITH ACCESSORIES Page
11
1. LSD6, LSDE, LSDG contactors, sizes 6, 10 and 12 Identical for sizes 6 to 12

3. Withdrawable coils for LSD contactors with conventional Different according to size
operating mechanism
6. Surge suppressor (RC element), plug-mountable on
withdrawable coils
W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW

The ALEA generation of controls is a complete, modular system family, logically designed right down to the last detail, from
Page the basic units to the accessories.
12 W AC AND DC OPERATION
IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660)
The LSHD Auxiliary contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
The LSHD Auxiliary contactors have screw or Cage Clamp terminals. Four contacts are available in the basic unit.
(Cage Clamp on request)
W AUXILIARY CONTACTORS SIZE 00, WITH ACCESSORIES
1. Auxiliary contactor
2. Auxiliary contactor for PLC-use
8. 1-pole auxiliary contact block, cable entry from below
10. 4-pole auxiliary contact block (terminal designations according to EN 50005)
13. Solder pin adapter for auxiliary contactor
16. Surge suppressor
W LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3-POLE, 3 ... 250 kW –

GENERAL INFORMATIONS
W LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, SIZES 00 TO 3, UP TO 45 kW Page
13
AC AND DC OPERATION
According to IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660). The LSD contactors are climate-proof. They are finger-safe according to
EN 50274. Size size 00 contactors have an auxiliary contact integrated in the basic unit. The basic units of sizes 0 to 3
contain only the main current paths. All basic units can be extended with auxiliary contacts and contact blocks.
CONNECTION METHODS
The LSD contactors are available with screw terminals (box terminals and connecting bars) or with Cage Clamp terminals.
The size 3 contactors have removable box terminals for the main conductor connections. This permits connection of ring
terminal lugs or busbars.
CONTACT RELIABILITY
If voltages ≤ 110 V and current ≤ 100 mA are to be switched, the auxiliary contacts of the LSD contactor or LSH auxiliary
contactor should be used as they guarantee a high level of contact reliability. These auxiliary contacts are suitable for solid-
state circuits with currents ≥ 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V.
SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION OF THE CONTACTORS

Short-circuit protection of the contactors without overload relay, see Technical specifications. For short-circuit protection of
the contactors with overload relay, see "Thermal Overload Relays". To assemble fuseless motor feeders you must select
combinations of motor protection switches (MPS) and contactor.
MOTOR PROTECTION
LST thermal overload relays can be fitted to the LSD contactors for protection against overload. The overload relays must be
ordered separately.
RATINGS OF INDUCTION MOTORS

The quoted rating (in kW) refers to the output power on the motor shaft (according to the nameplate).
SURGE SUPPRESSION
LSD contactors can be retrofitted with RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies (assembly of diode and Zener diode
for short break times) for damping opening surges in the coil. The surge suppressors are plugged onto the front of size 00
contactors. Space is provided for them next to a snap-on auxiliary contact block. For sizes 0 to 3 contactors, varistors and
RC elements can be snapped on either on the top or directly below the coil terminals. Diode assemblies are available in 2
different versions on account of their polarity. Depending on the application they can be connected either only at the
bottom (assembly with MPS) or only at the top (assembly with overload relay). The plug-in direction of the diodes and diode
assemblies is specified by coding.
Exceptions:
LSZD0006, in this case the plug-in direction is marked with "+" and "-"
Auxiliary contactors are supplied either without surge suppression or with a varistor or diode connected as standard,
according to the version.
Note:
The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are
damped against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).

Page W LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, SIZES 6 TO 12, > 45 TO 250 kW
14
• LSD contactors for switching motors
• LSR contactors for AC-1 applications
UC OPERATION
The contactors can be operated with AC (40 to 60 Hz) as well as with DC.
WITHDRAWABLE COILS
For simple coil replacement, e.g. if the application is replaced, the magnetic coil can be pulled out upwards after the release
mechanism has been actuated and can be replaced by any other coil of the same size.
AUXILIARY CONTACT COMPLEMENT

The contactors can be fitted with up to 8 auxiliary contacts (identical auxiliary contact blocks from sizes 0 to 12). Of these,
no more than 4 are permitted to be NC contacts.
The magnetic coil is switched directly on and off with the control supply voltage Us by way of terminals A1/A2.
MULTI-VOLTAGE RANGE FOR THE CONTROL SUPPLY VOLTAGE US:

Several closely adjacent control supply voltages, available around the world, are covered by just one coil, for example
110-115-120-127 V UC or 220-230-240 V UC. In addition, allowance is also made for a coil operating range of 0.8 times
the lower (Us min) and 1.1 times the upper (Us max) rated control supply voltage within which the contactor switches
reliably and no thermal overloading occurs.
W LSS, LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3-POLE, 3 ... 250 kW –

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS Page
Various auxiliary contact blocks can be added to the contactor basic units depending on the application: 15
W SIZE 00
LSSD, LSDD CONTACTORS

Terminal designations according to EN 50012.
Size 00 contactors have an auxiliary contact integrated in the basic

unit.
Contactors with a NO contact as auxiliary contact with screw or Cage

Clamp terminals, can be expanded into contactors with 2, 4 and 5
with 1 NO with 1 NC
auxiliary contacts according to EN 50012 using auxiliary contact blocks.
These auxiliary contact blocks cannot be combined with contactors
which have a NC contact in the basic unit as they are coded.
LSZD0501,510 single-auxiliary contact blocks with connection options

from below enable easy and clearly arranged wiring especially for the
installation of network access junctions. These auxiliary contact blocks
are offered only with screw terminals.
LSZDD201,212,213,222 LSZDH540,531,522
LSZD0501,510
All the previously mentioned auxiliary contact variants can be snap-
fitted onto the front of the contactor. The auxiliary contact block has
a centrally positioned release lever for disassembly.
W SIZES 0 TO 12
LSD0 TO LSDG CONTACTORS, 1-POLE AUXILIARY CONTACTS

The terminal designations of the single-pole auxiliary contacts

are comprised of sequence numbers (location identifiers) on
the contactor (1...4) and of function numbers on the auxiliary
contactors
contacts (.1/.2, .3/.4 or .5/.6, .7/.8).
size 0 to 12
The terminal designation of these individual auxiliary contacts

corresponds to EN 50005 and EN 50012.
LSZ0D010 LSZ0D001
LSZ0D910 LSZ0D901
(early make) (delayed)

Page W SIZES 0 TO 12
16 LSD0 TO LSDG CONTACTORS, 4-POLE AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS
The contactors themselves have no integrated auxiliary

conducting path.
contactors The auxiliary contact variants are uniform for the

size 0 to 12
contactors of size 0 to 12.
One 4-pole or up to four single-pole auxiliary contact blocks

(screw or Cage Clamp terminals) can be snapped on. When
the contactors are switched on, the NC contacts are opened
first and then the NO contacts are closed.
If the installation space is limited in depth, 2-pole auxiliary

LSZ0D131,122,113 LSZ0D140F.,122F.,131F.,104F.
contact blocks (screw or Cage Clamp terminals) can be
attached laterally for use on the left or on the right (LSZ0D711,
LSZ3D811).
The auxiliary contact blocks attached to the front can be dis-

assembled with the help of a centrally arranged release lever;
the laterally attached auxiliary contact blocks are easy to
remove by pressing on the checkered surfaces.
The laterally attachable auxiliary contact blocks according to

EN 50012 can be used only when no 4-pole auxiliary contact
blocks are snapped onto the front. If single-pole auxiliary
contact blocks are used in addition, the location identifiers on
the contactor must be noted.
W SIZES 0 AND 2
A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts can be attached; the auxiliary contact blocks used can be of any version. For reasons of
symmetry, when two 2-pole laterally mountable auxiliary contact blocks are used, one block must be attached on the right
and one on the left. More auxiliary contacts are permissible with size 2 under certain conditions (please ask). For 4-pole
contactors see LSR...
W SIZES 3 TO 12
A maximum of 8 auxiliary contacts can be attached; please note the following:

• Of these 8 auxiliary contacts, there must be no more than 4 NC contacts
• Ensure the symmetry of laterally mounted auxiliary contact blocks
For 4-pole contactors see LSR...
W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS – GENERAL INFORMATIONS
W CONTACT RELIABILITY
High contact stability at low voltages and currents, suitable for solid-state circuits with currents ≥ 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V. Page
17
W SURGE SUPPRESSION
RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies (combination of a diode and a Zener diode) can be plugged onto all
auxiliary contactors from the front for damping opening surges in the coil. The plug-in direction is determined by a coding
device.
Note:
The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are damped
against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).
W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS

The LSHD auxiliary contactors can be expanded by up to four contacts by the addition of mountable auxiliary contact blocks.
The auxiliary contact block can easily be snapped onto the front of the contactors. The auxiliary contact block has a centrally
positioned release lever for disassembly. All auxiliary contactors with 4 contacts according to EN 50011 can be extended with
auxiliary contact blocks to obtain auxiliary contactors with 5 or 8 contacts in accordance with EN 50005.
Aux. contactors,
EN 50 011, 4 contacts
4NO; 3NO + 1NC;

2NO + 2NC
Aux. contact blocks

EN 50 005,
4 or 1 contacts
LSZDH540,531,522
LSZD0501,510
W LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 00

W SCHRACK-INFO
Page Auxiliary contact block types LSZD.... can be snapped on contac-
18 tors LSDD.... Contactors for PLC cannot be extended by further
auxiliary contacts. Suitable surge supressor types LSZD0001 to
LSZD0004.
LSDD.... LSSD....-PLC
DESCRIPTION COIL VOLTAGE FREQU/REMARK ORDER NO.

SIZE 00 – TYPE LSDD
Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NO AC24V 50HZ LSDD0710
Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NC* AC24V 50HZ LSDD0720
Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NO AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD0713
Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NC* AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD0723
Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NO DC24V LSDD0715
Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NC* DC24V LSDD0725
Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NO AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD0913
Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NC* AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD0923
Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NO DC24V LSDD0915
Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NC* DC24V LSDD0925
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO AC24V 50HZ LSDD1210
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC* AC24V 50HZ LSDD1220
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO AC110V 50HZ LSDD1212
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC* AC110V 50HZ LSDD1222
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD1213
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC* AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD1223
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO DC24V LSDD1215
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC* DC24V LSDD1225
SIZE 00 – TYPE LSSD FOR PLC
Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD071G
Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD072G
Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD091G
Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD092G
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD121G
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD122G
* Only auxiliary contact block type LSZDH5.. and LSZD05.. possible

W SCHRACK-INFO
Auxiliary contact and contact block types LSZ0D... can be snapped on. Suitable surge Page
supressor types LSZD0005, LSZD0006 and LSZ00001 to LSZ00003. 19
LSD0....

SIZE 0 – TYPE LSD0
Contactor AC3:4KW/400V AC24V 50HZ LSD00930
Contactor AC3:4KW/400V DC24V LSD00935
Contactor AC3:4KW/400V AC230V 50/60HZ LSD00933
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V AC24V 50HZ LSD01230
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V DC24V LSD01235
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V AC230V 50/60HZ LSD01233
SIZE 0 – TYPE LSS0 FOR PLC
Contactor AC3,5,5KW/400V* DC17-30V LSS0123H
Contactor AC3:7,5KW/400V* DC17-30V LSS0173H
Contactor AC3:11KW/400V* DC17-30V LSS0253H
* Max. 2 pcs. of auxiliary contact type LSZ0D0.. or LSZ0D9.. possible

W SCHRACK-INFO
Page Auxiliary contact and contact block types LSZ0D... can be snapped on. Suitable surge
20 supressor types LSZ20001 for AC 230V.
LSD2....


W SCHRACK-INFO
Auxiliary contact and contact block types LSZ0D... and LSZ3D... can be snapped on. Suitable
surge supressor types LSZ20001 for AC 230V.
LSD3....

Contactor AC3:30KW/400V, 2NO+2NC AC230V 50HZ LSD36553
Contactor AC3:45KW/400V, 2NO+2NC AC230V 50/60HZ LSD39553
W LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 6/10/12

W SCHRACK-INFO
LSD6115F fitted with box terminals Page
up to 70 mm 2, all other types 21
without box terminals. Those box
terminals are deliverable on request.
Auxiliary contact and contact block
LSD6115F LSD6155F LSDE305F
types LSZ0D... and LSZ3D... can be
snapped on. Suitable surge supres-
sor type LSZ60001.

Contactor AC3:55KW/400V, 2NO+2NC (with box terminals) UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSD6115F
Contactor AC3:75KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSD6155F
Contactor AC3:90KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSD6195F
SIZE 10 – TYPE LSDE
Contactor AC3:110KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSDE225F
SIZE 12 – TYPE LSDG
Contactor AC3:200KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSDG415F
Contactor AC3:250KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSDG515F
W LSD VACUUM CONTACTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 14
W SCHRACK-INFO
Contactors cannot be extended by further auxiliary contacts. Surge supressor by means of a
varistor circuit is included in the scope of supply.
LSDH....

SIZE 14 – TYPE LSDH
Contactor AC3:335KW/400V, 4NO+4NC UC200-240V 50HZ LSDH63G3
W LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES AC3, SIZE 00/0/2/3

W SCHRACK-INFO
Page For higher ratings or customer assembly see components listed
22 on pages onwards.
LSWD.... LSW0....

SIZE 00 – TYPE LSWD
Reversing Assembly AC3, 3kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSWD0733
Reversing Assembly AC3, 4kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSWD0933
Reversing Assembly AC3, 5,5kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSWD1233
SIZE 0 – TYPE LSW0
Reversing Assembly AC3, 5,5kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSW01233
Reversing Assembly AC3, 11kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSW02533
W LSY WYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES AC3, SIZE 00/0/2

W SCHRACK-INFO
For higher ratings or customer assembly see components listed on pages onwards.
LSY03233

SIZE 00 – TYPE LSYD
WYE-Delta Assembly AC3, up to 7,5kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSYD1733
SIZE 0 – TYPE LSY0
WYE-Delta Assembly AC3, up to 15kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSY03233
SIZE 2 – TYPE LSY2
WYE-Delta Assembly AC3, up to 22kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSY25033
W LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOADS – 4POLE, SIZE 00/0

W SCHRACK-INFO
Auxiliary contacts, contact blocks and surge supressors are identical to those for contactors Page
LSD of same size. 23
LSR0....

SIZE 00 – TYPE LSRD
Contactor AC1:18A/690V AC24V 50/60HZ LSRD1840
Contactor AC1:18A/690V DC24V LSRD1845
Contactor AC1:22A/690V DC24V LSRD2245
SIZE 0 – TYPE LSR0
Contactor AC1:35A/690V AC24V 50HZ LSR03540
Contactor AC1:35A/690V DC24V LSR03545
Contactor AC1:35A/690V AC230V 50/60HZ LSR03543
W LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOADS – 4POLE, SIZE 2/3

W SCHRACK-INFO
Auxiliary contacts, contact blocks and surge supressors are identical to those for contactors
LSD of same size.
LSR3....

W LSK CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS

W SCHRACK-INFO
Page • Technical data according to IEC 60 947; EN 60 947 (VDE 0660)
24 • The contactors are suitable for use in any climate
• They are finger-safe according to EN 50274
LSKD17B3
W TECHNICAL DATA
The LSK capacitor contactors are special version of the size 00-3 ALEA contactors. The capacitors are precharged by means of
the mounted leading NO contacts and resistors; only then do the main contacts close. This prevents disturbances in the net-
work and welding of the contactors. Only discharged capacitors are permitted to be switched on with capacitor contactors.
The auxiliary contact block which is snapped onto the capacitor contactor contains the three leading NO contacts and in the
case of size 00 one standard NC contact and in the case of size 0 and size 3 one standard NO contact, which is unassigned.
Size S00 also contains another unassigned NO contact in the basic unit. In addition, a 2-pole auxiliary contact block can be
mounted laterally on the LSK3 capacitor contactors (1 NO + 1 NC versions) type LSZ0D711. The fitting of auxiliary contacts for
LSKD and LSK0 is not expandable.
CAPACITOR RATING 400V/INCLUDED AUXILIARY CONTACTS COIL VOLTAGE FREQU/REMARK ORDER NO.
SIZE 00
12,5 kVAr/1 NO + 1 NC AC230V 50/50Hz LSKD17B3
SIZE 0
25 kVAr/1 NO AC230V 50/50Hz LSK03213
SIZE 3
50 kVAr/1 NO AC230V 50/50Hz LSK36213
W LA3K CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS

W SCHRACK-INFO
• For use in detuned or non-detuned capacitor units.
• Technical data according to EN 60 947-4-1; EN 60 947-5-1; VDE 0660
LA3K181
W TECHNICAL DATA
Specification: The capacitor switching contactors K3-..K are suitable for switching low-inductive and lowloss capacitors in
capacitor banks (IEC70 & 831, VDE 0560) with and without reactors. Capacitor switching contactors are fitted with early
make contacts and damping resistors to reduce the value of the make current to <70 x Ie.
Operating conditions: Capacitor switching contactors are protected against contact welding for a prospective make
current of 200 x Ie. Fuse rating approx. 1,6 to 2,5 x Ie, type gL/gG.
12,5 kVAr/1 NO AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K1813
12,5 kVAr/1 NC AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K1823
20 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K2433
25 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K3233
33,3 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K5033
50 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K6233
60 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K7433
75 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K9033
90 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K1133
W AUXILIARY CONTACTS FOR CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS LA3K
Page
25
LA1901..
AUXILIARY CONTACTS FOR CAPACITY SWITCHING CONTACTORS LA3K
AUXILIARY CONTACT for LA3K18, 1NC, snap on front 6A/230VAC DIN EN 5005/50012 LA190135
AUXILIARY CONTACT for LA3K24...11, 1NO+1NC, side mounted 3A/230VAC DIN EN 5005 LA190134
AUXILIARY CONTACT for LA3K…., 1NO, snap on front 3A/230VAC DIN EN 5005/50012 LA190100
AUXILIARY CONTACT for LA3K…., 1NC, snap on front 3A/230VAC DIN EN 5005/50012 LA190101
W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS AC15 – 4POLE, SIZE 00

W SCHRACK-INFO
Auxiliary contact types LSZD05.. and LSZDH5.. can be snapped
on. Contactors for PLC cannot be extended by further auxiliary
contacts. Suitable surge supressor types LSZD0001 to LSZD0004.
LSHD.... LSHD....-PLC

SIZE 00 – TYPE LSHD
Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO AC24V 50HZ LSHD0670
Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO DC24V LSHD0675
Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO AC230V 50/60HZ LSHD0673
Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC AC24V 50HZ LSHD0680
Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC DC24V LSHD0685
Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC AC230V 50/60HZ LSHD0683
Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC AC24V 50HZ LSHD0690
Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC DC24V LSHD0695
Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC AC230V 50/60HZ LSHD0693
SIZE 00 – TYPE LSHD FOR PLC
Contactor*, AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD067N
Contactor with diode assembly, AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD067G
Contactor*, AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD068N
Contactor with diode assembly, AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD068G
Contactor*, AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD069N
Contactor with diode assembly, AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD069G
* Varistors or surge supressor diodes can be plugged in
W AUXILIARY CONTACTS AND CONTACT BLOCKS FOR LSDD OR LSSD, SIZE 00
Page
26
LSZDD213 LSZD0510
DESCRIPTION FREQU/REMARK ORDER NO.

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NO, cable entry from below DIN EN 50005 LSZD0510
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NC, cable entry from below DIN EN 50005 LSZD0501
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NC1) DIN EN 50012 LSZDD201
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NO+2NC1) DIN EN 50012 LSZDD212
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NO+3NC1) DIN EN 50012 LSZDD213
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 2NO+2NC 1)
DIN EN 50012 LSZDD222
1)
Auxiliary contact blocks for use with contactors type LSDD.... or LSSD.... with one NO included, for contators type LSDD.... or LSSD.... with one NC included use auxiliary contact blocks type
LSZDH5.. (see item below)
W AUXILIARY CONTACTS AND CONTACT BLOCKS FOR LSDD, LSSD OR LSHD, SIZE 00
LSZDH522 LSZD0510

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NO, cable entry from below DIN EN 50005 LSZD0510
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NC, cable entry from below DIN EN 50005 LSZD0501
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 4NO2) DIN EN 50005 LSZDH540
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 3NO+1NC2) DIN EN 50005 LSZDH531
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 2NO+2NC 2)
DIN EN 50005 LSZDH522
2)
Auxiliary contact blocks for use with contactors type LSDD.... or LSSD.... with one NC included, for contators type LSDD.... or LSSD.... with one NO included use auxiliary contact blocks type
LSZDD2.. (see item above)
W PARALLEL CONNECTORS (STAR JUMPER) AND FEED TERMINAL, SIZE 00
LSZDY002 LSZDD003 LSZDD001
DESCRIPTION ORDER NO.

PARALLEL CONNECTOR
Parallel connector, 25mm 2 for size 00, 3pol. + terminal LSZDD003
Parallel connector, 25mm2 for size 00, 4pol. + terminal LSZDD004
Parallel connector, star jumper for size 00, 3pol. (can be shortened by 1 pole) LSZDY002
FEED TERMINAL
Feed terminal, 6mm2 for size 00, 3pol. + 3 terminals LSZDD001
W WIRING SETS*, MECHANICAL INTERLOCK AND CONNECTION CLIPS, SIZE 00

W SCHRACK-INFO
By using the interlock link, the overall width of the e.g. reversing assembly is not increased Page
(0 mm clearance between the contactors). 27
LSZDW002

Wiring set for reversing contactor assemblies, size 00* LSZDW001
Wiring set for WYE-Delta contactor assemblies, size 00 LSZDY001
Connection clips for two contactors, size 00* LSZDW002
* Contains two connection clips and one mechanical interlock link
W WYE-DELTA TIMERS
W SCHRACK-INFO
Timers have a fixed dead intervall of 50 ms (between Wye- and Delta-state).
LSZD0102

WYE-Delta timer, 20s (timedelay -20s) 24/240VAC 24 VDC 50/60Hz LSZD0101
WYE-Delta timer, 60s (timedelay -60s) 24/240VAC 24 VDC 50/60Hz LSZD0102
W CONNECTION LINKS FOR CONTACTORS AND MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES,

SIZE 00
LSZDD005
DESCRIPTION COIL VOLTAGE ORDER NO.

Connection link for contactor size 00 and
motor protection switch, size 00 AC-DC operated LSZDD005
Connection link for contactor size 00 and
motor protection switch, size 0 AC-DC operated LSZDD006
W SOLDER PIN ADAPTER, SIZE 00
Page
28
LSZDD002

Solder pin adapter for size 00 LSZDD002
W SURGE SUPRESSORS (PLUG IN TYPE), SIZE 00
LSZD0004

Varistor for size 00 AC24-48V; DC24-70V LSZD0001
Varistor for size 00 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZD0002
Surge supressor for size 00 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZD0003
Surge supressor diode for size 00 DC12-250V LSZD0004
W AUXILIARY CONTACTS (SNAP ON FRONT), SIZE 0-12
LSZ0D001 LSZ0D010

Auxiliary Contact for size 0-12, 1NC DIN EN 50005/50012 LSZ0D001
Auxiliary Contact for size 0-12, 1NO DIN EN 50005/50012 LSZ0D010
Auxiliary Contact for size 0-12, 1NC-delayed DIN EN 50005/50012 LSZ0D901
Auxiliary Contact for size 0-12, 1NO-early make DIN EN 50005/50012 LSZ0D910
W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS (SNAP ON FRONT), SIZE 0-12
Page
29
LSZ0D122

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 1NO+3NC DIN EN 50012 LSZ0D113
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 4NO DIN EN 50005 LSZ0D140F
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 3NO+1NC DIN EN 50005 LSZ0D131F
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 2NO+2NC DIN EN 50005 LSZ0D122F
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 4NC DIN EN 50005 LSZ0D104F
W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS (SIDE MOUNTED), SIZE 0-12
LSZ0D711

Auxiliary Contact, sidemounted for size 0-12, 1NO+1NC, first position DIN EN 50012 LSZ0D711
Auxiliary Contact, sidemounted for size 3-12, 1NO+1NC, second position DIN EN 50012 LSZ3D811
W MECHANICAL INTERLOCKS, SIZE 0-12
LSZ0W002

Mechanical interlock for contactors size 0-3 (including 2NC auxiliary contacts) LSZ0W002
Mechanical interlock for contactors size 6-12 LSZ6W001
W WIRING SETS FOR REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES, SIZE 0-12

Page
Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 0 LSZ0W001
30 Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 2, including connection clips LSZ2W001
Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 3, including connection clips LSZ3W001
Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 6 LSZ6W002
Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 10 LSZEW001
Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 12 LSZGW001
W WIRING SETS FOR YD-ASSEMBLIES AND YD-ACCESSORIES, SIZE 0-3

Wiring set for YD-assemblies, size 0, including mech.interlock and connection clips LSZ0Y001
Wiring set for YD-assemblies, size 2-2-0 LSZ2Y004
Wiring set for YD-assemblies, size 2-2-2 LSZ2Y003
Mountingplate for YD-assemblies, size 2-2-0 LSZ2Y001
Mountingplate for YD-assemblies, size 2-2-2 LSZ2Y002
W CONNECTION LINKS FOR CONTACTORS AND MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES,

SIZE 0-3
LSZ0D002 LSZ2D004

Connection link for contactor size 0 and BES0 AC operating assemblies LSZ0D002
Connection link for contactor size 0 and BES0 DC operating assemblies LSZ0D004
W PARALLEL CONNECTORS (STAR JUMPER) AND FEED TERMINALS, SIZE 0-12
Page
31
LSZ0Y002 LSZ6Y003 LSZ2D003 BEZ00116
W SCHRACK-INFO
Star jumper size 0-3 can be reduced by 1 pole*. For touch-protection of parallel connectors size 6 use LSZ6D002, for size
10 and size 12 use LSZED002.

PARALLEL CONNECTOR
Parallel connector, 35mm 2 for size 0, 3pol. + terminal LSZ0D003
Parallel connector, star jumper for size 0, 3pol.* LSZ0Y002
Parallel connector; 95mm2 for size 2, 3pol.+terminal LSZ2D003
Parallel connector, star jumper for size 6, 3pol. (with bore diameter 10,5mm) LSZ6Y003
Parallel connector, star jumper for size 10, 12, 3pol. (with bore diameter 12,5mm) LSZEY003
FEED TERMINALS
Feed terminal, 25mm2 for size 0, 3pol. + 3 terminals BEZ00116
Feed terminal, 50mm2 for size 2, 3pol. + 3 terminals BEZ00216
Feed terminal, 95mm for size 3, 1pol. + terminal
2
LSZ3D001
W SURGE SUPRESSORS, SIZE 0-12

W SCHRACK-INFO
Up to size 3, these devices can be snapped in either at the top (assemblies with overload
relays) or at the bottom (assemblies with MPS) of the contactor. Sizes 6-12: snapping in is
only possible at the top of contactor.
LSZ00002

Surge supressor, diode assembly for size 0, top mounted DC24V LSZD0005
Surge supressor, diode assembly for size 0, bottom mounted DC24V (marked with “+” and “–“) LSZD0006
Varistor for size 0 AC24-48V; DC24-70V LSZ00001
Varistor for size 0 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZ00002
Surge supressor, RC for size 0 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZ00003
Surge supressor, RC for size 2-3 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZ20001
Surge supressor, RC for size 6-12 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZ60001
W CONNECTION CLIPS FOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0-3

W SCHRACK-INFO
Page 2 pieces of clips are necessary for 1 contactor-assembly
32 (2 contactors).
LSZ2W003 LSZ2D001

Connection clip, for contactors 3/4pole, size 0 to 0 (contactors without interlock) LSZ0W003
Connection clip, for contactors 3/4pole, size 0 to 0 (interlocked contactors - clearance 10 mm) LSZ0W004
Connection clip, for contactors 4pole, size 2 to 2 (interlocked contactors - clearance 10 mm) LSZ2W002
Connection clip, for contactors 4pole, size 3 to 3 (interlocked contactors - clearance 10 mm) LSZ3W002
Connection clip, for contactors 3pole, size 2/3/6 to 2/3/6 (interlocked contactors - clearance 10 mm) LSZ2W003
Connection clip, for contactors 3/4pole, size 2/3 (contactors without interlock) LSZ2D001
W MECHANICAL LATCHING BLOCK, SIZE 0-2

W SCHRACK-INFO
Contactors fitted with this latching block will remain “ON” in case of control-voltage failure
until the latching block is resetted by a 24 VAC DC impuls.
LSZ00113

Mechanical latching block for size 0-2, remains "ON" if voltage fails 24VACDC LSZ00113
W TERMINAL COVERS, SIZE 2-14

W SCHRACK-INFO
Additional covers for contactors with box terminals size 6-12
on request.
LSZ6D001 LSZ6D002

Terminal Cover for size 2* (additional cover, to be fitted on the box terminals) LSZ2D002
Terminal Cover for size 3* (additional cover, to be fitted on the box terminals) LSZ3D002
Terminal Cover for size 6* for contactors with cable lug or busbar connection (38 mm) LSZ6D001
Terminal Cover - short version for size 6* for contactor assemblies (100 mm) LSZ6D002
Terminal Cover for size 10*/12* for contactors with cable lug or busbar connection (120 mm) LSZED001
Terminal Cover - short version for size 10*/12* for contactors with cable lug or busbar connection (42 mm) LSZED002
Terminal Cover for size 14* for contactors with cable lug or busbar connection LSZHD001
* Order 2 pcs. for one complete contactor, order 1 pc. just for one side (up side or bottom side) of contactor
Schu?tzkatalog_engl_Teil2_neu_AK6:KAPITEL_01_AK3_korr 16.03.2009 13:58 Uhr Seite 33
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
W LSS, LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 3 ... 250 kW

• ALEA controls are climate-proof and are suitable and tested for use worldwide.
• If the devices are used in ambient conditions which deviate from common industrial conditions (EN60721-3-3 “Stationary Page
Use, Weather-Protected“), the manufacturer must be consulted about possible restrictions with regard to the reliability and
endurance of the device and possible protective measures. 33
Contactor Type LSS, LSD
Size 00 ... 12
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts
Acc. to IEC 60947-5-1/EN 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200)
The data apply to integrated auxiliary contacts and contacts in the auxiliary
contact blocks for contactor sizes S00 to S121)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) V 690
For LSZ..... laterally mountable auxiliary contact blocks V max. 500
Continuous thermal current Ith = A 10
Rated operational current Ie/AC-12
AC load
Rated operational current Ie/AC-15/AC-14
for rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 6
110 V A 6
125 V A 6
220 V A 6
230 V A 6
380 V A 3
400 V A 3
500 V A 2
660 V2) A 1
690 V2) A 1
DC load
Rated operational current Ie/DC-12
for rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 10
60 V A 6
110 V A 3
125 V A 2
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.3
600 V2) A 0.15
for rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 101)
60 V A 2
110 V A 1
125 V A 0.9
220 V A 0.3
440 V A 0,14
600 V2) A 0,1
• Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA Frequency of contact faults < 10-8 i.e. <1 fault per 100 million operating cycles
acc. to EN 60947-5-4
Endurance of the auxiliary contacts
It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i.e.
not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system.
The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking current.
The characteristic curves apply to
• Integrated auxiliary contacts for LSS/LSD
• LSZ..... auxiliary contact blocks for contactor sizes S00 to S12.
1) Attachable auxiliary contact blocks for size S00 and laterally mountable Legend:
auxiliary contact blocks for S0 to S12: 6 A. Ia = Breaking current
2) Up to 500 V switching capacity for laterally mountable auxiliary contact blocks. Ie = Rated operational current

Endurance of the main contacts
Page
The characteristic curves show the contact endurance of the contactors when switching Size 00
34 resistive and inductive AC loads (AC-1/AC-3) depending on the breaking current and
rated operational voltage. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched
Contactor type LSSD07, Contactor type LSSD09, LSSD12,
randomly, i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system. LSDD07 LSDD09, LSDD12
3 kW 4 kW 5,5 kW
The rated operational current Ie complies with utilization category AC-4 (breaking six times
the rated operational current) and is intended for a contact endurance of at least 200 000
operating cycles.
If a shorter endurance is sufficient, the rated operational current Ie /AC-4 can be increased.
If the contacts are used for mixed operation, i.e. normal switching (breaking the rated
operational current according to utilization category AC-3) in combination with intermittent
inching (breaking several times the rated operational current according to utilization
category AC-4), the contact endurance can be calculated approximately from the following
equation:
Characters in the equation:

X Contact endurance for mixed operation in operating cycles
A Contact endurance for normal operation (Ia = Ie ) in operating cycles
B Contact endurance for inching (Ia = multiple of Ie ) in operating cycles
C Inching operations as a percentage of total switching operations
Size 0
Contactor type – LSS012 LSS017 LSS025

LSD009 LSD012 LSD017 LSD025
Diagram legend:
PN = Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V
Ia = Breaking current
Ie = Rated operational current
W LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 3 ... 250 kW

Endurance of the main contacts
Page
Size 2 Size 3
35
Contactor type LSD232 LSD240 LSD250
Contactor type LSD365 LSD380 LSD395
Sizes 6–12
Contactor LSD611 LSD615 LSD619 LSDE22 LSDE26 LSDE30 LSDG41 LSDG51

type
Diagram legend:
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

The contactors with solid-state operating mechanism comply with the requirements for operation in industrial installations.
• Interference immunity
- Burst (IEC 61000-4-4): 4 kW
- Surge (IEC 61000-4-5): 4 kW
- Electrostatic discharge, ESD (IEC 61000-4-2): 8/15 kW
- Electromagnetic field (IEC 61000-4-3): 10 V/m
• Emitted interference
- Limited value class A according to EN 55011
Note: In connection with converters, the control cables should be installed seperatly from the load cables to the converter.

Contactor Type LSSD, LSDD
Page Size 00
General data
36 Permissible mounting position AC and DC operation
3 6 0 ° 2 2 ,5 ° 2 2 ,5 °
The contactors are designed for
operation on a vertical mounting surface.
Upright mounting position: AC operation
Special version required.

DC operation Standard version
Mechanical endurance Basic unit Operating 30 million
cycles
Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary 10 million
contact block
Solid-state compatible auxiliary 5 million
contact block
Electrical endurance 1)

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6
Safe isolation between the coil and the main contacts V 400
acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N
Ambient temperature During operation °C -25 ... +60
During storage °C -55 ... +80
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20, coil assembly IP40
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe
Shock resistance rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 7/5 and 4.2/10
DC operation g/ms 7/5 and 4.2/10
Shock resistance sine pulse AC operation g/ms 9.8/5 and 5.9/10
DC operation g/ms 9.8/5 and 5.9/10
Conductor cross-sections 2)
Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relays

For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays see
Protection Equipment: Overload Relays
For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see Load Feeders,
Motor Starters and Soft Starters: -> 3RA Fuseless Load Feeders.
Main circuit
• Fuse links gL/gG LV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED
- Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 35
EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 20
Weld-free 3) A 10
• Miniature circuit breakers (up to 230 V) with C characteristic A 10
Short-circuit current 1 kA, type of coordination "1"
Auxiliary circuit
• Fuse links gL/gG A 10
DIAZED, NEOZED (weld-free protection Ik ≥ 1 kA)
• Miniature circuit breakers up to 230 V with C characteristic A 6
Short-circuit current Ik < 400 A
1) See first two pages of chapter Technical Specifications “Endurance of the main contacts”.
2) See “Conductor cross-sections” pages onward.
3) Test conditions according to IEC 60947-4-1.

Contactor Type LSSD, LSDD
Size 00 Page
Control
Magnetic coil operating range 37
• AC operation 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
• DC operation up to 50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
up to 60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Power consumption of the magnetic coils coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)
AC operation, 50/60 Hz
Standard version • Closing VA 27/24.3
• P.f. 0.8/0.75
• Closed VA 4.4/3.4
• P.f. 0.27/0.27
AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada • Closing VA 26.4
• P.f. for closing 0.81
• Closed VA 4.7
• P.f. for closed 0.26
AC operation, 60 Hz, USA/Canada • Closing VA 31.7
• P.f. for closing 0.77
• Closed VA 5.1
• P.f. for closed 0.27
DC operation Closing = Closed W 3.3
Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal)
• AC operation < 3 mA x (230 V/Us)
• DC operation < 10 mA x (24 V/Us)
Operating times1)
Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time
• AC operation Closing delay ms 8 ... 35
at 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us Opening delay ms 4 ... 30
• DC operation Closing delay ms 25 ... 100
at 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us Opening delay ms 7 ... 10
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15
Operating times for 1.0 x Us1)
Opening delay ms 5 ... 30
1) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor
coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to 6 times,varistor +2 to 5 ms).
Contactor Type LSSD07, LSDD07 LSSD09, LSDD09 LSSD12, LSDD12

Size 00 00 00
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-1
Switching resistive loads
Rated operational current Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 18 22 22
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 16 20 20
Rated power for AC loads1) 230 V kW 6.3 7.5 7.5
P.f.= 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 11 13 13
500 V kW 13.8 17 17
690 V kW 19 22 22
Minimum conductor cross-section at 40 °C mm² 2.5 2.5 2.5
for loads with Ie at 60 °C mm² 2.5 2.5 2.5
Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3
Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 7 9 12
440 V A 7 9 11
500 V A 5 6.5 9
690 V A 4 5.2 6.3
Rated power for slipring or squirrelcage at 230 V kW 2.2 3 3
motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 3 4 5.5
500 V kW 3.5 4.5 5.5
690 V kW 4 5.5 5.5
Thermal load capacity 10 s current 2) A 56 72 96
1) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. (increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into account).
2) According to IEC 60947-4-1. For rated values for various start-up conditions see Protection Equipment: Thermal Overload Relays.

Page Size 00 00 00
Main circuit
38 AC capacity
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 W 0.42 0.7 1.24
Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)
Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 6.5 8.5 8.5
Rated power for squirrel-cage motors up to 400 V kW 3 4 4
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz
• The following applies to a contact endurance of about 200000
operating cycles:
- rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 2.6 4.1 4.1
690 V A 1.8 3.3 3.3
• - rated power for squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 0.67 1.1 1.1
motors 400 V kW 1.15 2 2
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 500 V kW 1.45 2 2
690 V kW 1.15 2.5 2.5
Utilization category AC-5a
Switching gas discharge lamps, inductive ballast
Per main current path at 230 V
• Uncorrected,
rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp L 18 W/0.37 A Units 54 59 59
L 36 W/0.43 A Units 46 51 51
L 58 W/0.67 A Units 29 32 32
L 80 W/0.79 A Units 25 27 27
• DUO switching (two-lamp) L 18 W/0.22 A Units 90 (Ⳏ 2 x 90 lamps) 100 (Ⳏ 2 x 100 lamps) 100 (Ⳏ 2 x 100 lamps)
L 36 W/0.42 A Units 47 (Ⳏ 2 x 47 lamps) 52 (Ⳏ 2 x 52 lamps) 52 (Ⳏ 2 x 52 lamps)
Switching gas discharge lamps with correction
• Shunt compensation with inductive ballast,
rated power per lamp/capacitance/
rated operational current per lamp L 18 W/4.5 µF/0.11 A Units 17 22 22
L 36 W/4.5 µF/0.21 A Units 16 22 22
L 58 W/7.0 µF/0.32 A Units 10 14 14
L 80 W/7.0 µF/0.49 A Units 6 9 9
• With solid-state ballast1) single lamp
L 18 W/6.8 µF/0.10 A Units 49 63 63
L 36 W/6.8 µF/0.18 A Units 27 35 35
L 58 W/10 µF/0.29 A Units 16 23 23
L 80 W/10 µF/0.43 A Units 11 14 14
• With solid-state ballast 1) two-lamp
L 18 W/10 µF/0.18 A Units 27 (Ⳏ 2 x 27 lamps) 35 (Ⳏ 2 x 35 lamps) 35 (Ⳏ 2 x 35 lamps)
Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lamps kW 1.3 1.7 1.7
Per main current path at 230/220 V
switching AC transformers
Rated operational current Ie
• For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 3.6 5.1 7.2
Rated power P
• For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 1.4 2 2.9
400 V kVA 2.5 3.5 5
500 V kVA 3.3 4.6 6.2
690 V kVA 4.3 6 8.6
• For inrush current n = 30 at 230 V kVA 1 1.3 2
400 V kVA 1.6 2.3 3.5
500 V kVA 2.2 3.1 4.6
690 V kVA 2.9 4 6
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows:
Px = Pn 30 · 30/x
1) Depending on the electronic ballast used, higher lamp numbers are also possible.

Size 00 00 00 Page
Main circuit
DC capacity 39
Utilization category DC-1
Switching resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)
• 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 15 20
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 1.5 2.1
220 V A 0.6 0.8
440 V A 0.42 0.6
600 V A 0.42 0.6
• 2 conducting paths in series up to 24 V A 15 20
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 8.4 12
220 V A 1.2 1.6
440 V A 1.6 0.8
600 V A 0.5 0.7
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 15 20
220 V A 15 20
440 V A 0.9 1.3
600 V A 0.7 1
Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5
Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
60 V A 0.35 0.5
110 V A 0.1 0.15
220 V A – –
440 V A – –
600 V A – –
60 V A 3.5 5
110 V A 0.25 0.35
220 V A – –
440 V A – –
600 V A – –
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 15 20
220 V A 1.2 1.5
440 V A 0.14 0.2
600 V A 0.14 0.2
Switching frequency
Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour
• Contactors without overload relay No-load switching frequency AC h-1 10000
No-load switching frequency DC h-1 10000
Dependence of the switching Rated operation
frequency z ’ on the operational current AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1000
I ’ and operational voltage U ’: AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 750
z ’ = z . (I e /I ’) . (400 V/U ’)1.5 . 1/h AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 750
AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 250
• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 15
Conductor cross-sections
• Screw terminals Main and auxiliary conductors: Screw terminals
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) • Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (1 ... 4)
For standard screwdriver size 2 and • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
Pozidriv 2 • Solid or stranded, AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)1); 2 x (18 ... 14)1); 1 x 12
• AWG cables
• Terminal screw M3
- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)
• Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Main and auxiliary conductors; Cage Clamp terminals
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) coil connections:
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)
solid or stranded
1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not
apply.

Contactor Type – LSS012 LSS017 LSS025
Page LSD009 LSD012 LSD017 LSD025
Size 0 0 0 0
40 General data
Permissible mounting position
The contactors are designed for AC and DC operation 3 6 0 ° 2 2 ,5 ° 2 2 ,5 °
operation on a vertical mounting
surface.
Standard version
DC operation Special version required
Mechanical endurance Basic unit Operating 10 million

cycles
Basic unit with snap-on 10 million
auxiliary contact block

(acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N)
Mirror contacts
• A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC LSD0...., LSS0.... Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
contact that cannot be closed (removable auxiliary contact block)
simultaneously with a NO main contact.
LSD0...., LSS0.... Acc. to SUVA requirements on request
(permanent auxiliary contact block)
Permissible ambient temperature During operation °C -25 ... +60
Shock resistance rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 8.2/5 and 4.9/10
DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 7.5/10
Shock resistance sine pulse AC operation g/ms 12.5/5 and 7.8/10
DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 10/10

Main circuit For short-circuit protection for contactors with thermal overload relays see Protection
• Fuse links gL/gG Equipment: Thermal Overload Relays
• LV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see Load Feeders
• - acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 25 35
EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2"
Weld-free3) A 10 16
• Miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic A 25 32
(short-circuit current 3 kA, type of coordination "1")
Auxiliary circuit
DIAZED, NEOZED
(weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1 kA)
• Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic A 10
(short-circuit current Ik < 400 A)

Contactor Type LSS0, LSD0
Size 0 Page
Control
Magnetic coil operating range AC/DC
Power consumption of the magnetic coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us 41
AC operation, 50 Hz, • Closing VA 61
standard version • P.f. 0.82
• Closed VA 7.8
• P.f. 0.24
AC operation, 50/60 Hz, • Closing VA 64/63
standard version • P.f. 0.72/0.74
• Closed VA 8.4/6.8
• P.f. 0.24/0.28
AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada • Closing VA 61
• P.f. 0.82
• Closed VA 7.8
• P.f. 0.24
AC operation, 60 Hz, USA/Canada • Closing VA 69
• P.f. 0.76
• Closed VA 7.5
• P.f. 0.28
• AC operation mA < 6 mA x (230 V/Us)
• DC operation mA < 16 mA x (24 V/Us)
Operating times for 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us1)
Opening delay ms 13.5 ... 15.5
• Arcing time ms 10
Opening delay ms 14 ... 15.5
The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are
1)
increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks

(varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode assembly: 2 to 6 times).
LSD009 LSD012 LSD017 LSD025
Size 0 0 0 0
Main circuit
AC capacity
Rated operational current Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 40
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 35
Rated power for AC loads1) 230 V kW 13.3
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 23
500 V kW 29
690 V kW 40
Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 °C mm² 10
loads with Ie at 60 °C mm² 10
Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3
Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 9 12 17 25
440 V A 9 12 17 22
500 V A 6.5 12 17 18
690 V A 5.2 9 13 13
Rated power for slipring or squirrelcage at 110 V kW 1.1 1.5 2.2 3
motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 230 V kW 3 3 4 5.5
400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11
500 V kW 4.5 7.5 10 11
660 V / 690 V kW 5.5 7.5 11 11
Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 80 110 150 200
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 W 0.4 0.5 0.9 1.6

Size 0 0 0 0
42 Main circuit
AC capacity
Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 8.5 12.5 15.5 15.5
Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with at 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 7.5
50 Hz and 60 Hz
• The following applies to a contact endurance of about 200000 operating cycles:
Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 4.1 5.5 7.7 9
690 V A 3.3 5.5 7.7 9
Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with at 110 V kW 0.5 0.73 1 1.2
50 Hz and 60 Hz 230 V kW 1.1 1.5 2 2.5
400 V kW 2 2.6 3.5 4.4
500 V kW 2 3.3 4.6 5.6
690 V kW 2.5 4.6 6 7.7
Per main current path at 230 V1)
Rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp
Uncorrected L 18 W/0.37 A Units 108
L 36 W/0.43 A Units 93
L 58 W/0.67 A Units 59
L 80 W/0.79 A Units 50
DUO switching (two-lamp) L 18 W/0.22 A Units 181 (Ⳏ 2 x 181 lamps)
L 36 W/0.42 A Units 95 (Ⳏ 2 x 95 lamps)
Rated power per lamp/capacitance/rated operational current per lamp
• Shunt compensation with inductive ballast L 18 W/4.5 µF/0.11 A Units 37 41 61
L 36 W/4.5 µF/0.21 A Units 30 30 51
L 58 W/7.0 µF/0.32 A Units 20 20 33
L 80 W/7.0 µF/0.49 A Units 13 13 22
• With solid-state ballast2) single lamp L 18 W/6.8 µF/0.10 A Units 105 119 175
L 36 W/6.8 µF/0.18 A Units 58 66 97
L 58 W/10 µF/0.29 A Units 36 41 60
L 80 W/10 µF/0.43 A Units 24 27 40
• With solid-state ballast2) two-lamp L 18 W/10 µF/0.18 A Units 58 (Ⳏ 2 x 58 lamps) 66 (Ⳏ 2 x 66 l.) 97 (Ⳏ 2 x 97 l.)
L 36 W/10 µF/0.35 A Units 30 (Ⳏ 2 x 30 lamps) 34 (Ⳏ 2 x 34 l.) 50 (Ⳏ 2 x 50 l.)
Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lamps
Per main current path at 230/220 V kW 2.8 3.2 4.7
• For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 11.4 20.2
• For inrush current n = 30 up to 400 V A 7.6 13.5
Rating P
• For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 4.5 8
400 V kVA 7.9 13.9
500 V kVA 9.9 15.5
690 V kVA 13.6 15.5
• For inrush current n = 30 at 230 V kVA 3 5.4
400 V kVA 5.2 9.3
500 V kVA 6.6 11.7
690 V kVA 9.1 15.5
Px = Pn30 . 30/x
Utilization category AC-6b,
switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric) AC capacitors
Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 5.8 10.8
Rated power for single capacitors or at 230 V kvar 2.5 4
banks of capacitors (minimum inductance 400 V kvar 4 7.5
of 6 µH between capacitors connected in 500 V kvar 4 7.5
parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 4 7.5
1) For Ie/AC-1 = 35 A (60 °C) and the corresponding minimum conductor cross-section 10 mm2.

LSD009 LSD012 LSD017 LSD025 Page
Size 0 0 0 0
Main circuit 43
DC capacity
Switching resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1ms)
• 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 35
60 V A 20
110 V A 4.5
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.4
600 V A 0.25
• 2 conducting paths in series up to 24 V A 35
60 V A 35
110 V A 35
220 V A 5
440 V A 1
600 V A 0.8
60 V A 35
110 V A 35
220 V A 35
440 V A 2.9
600 V A 1.4
60 V A 5
110 V A 2.5
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.09
600 V A 0.06
60 V A 35
110 V A 15
220 V A 3
440 V A 0.27
600 V A 0.16
60 V A 35
110 V A 35
220 V A 10
440 V A 0.6
600 V A 0.6
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching h-1 5000
frequency AC
Dependence of the switching frequency z ’ No-load switching h-1 1500
on the operational current I ’ and operational frequency DC
voltage U ’:
z’ = z . (Ie/I ’) . (400 V/U ’)1.5 . 1/h AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1000
AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 750
AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 750
AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 300 250
• Contactors with Thermal overload relays (mean value) h-1 15

Size 0 0 0 0
44 Conductor cross-sections
Screw terminals Main conductors Screw terminals
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) Conductor cross-section
• Solid mm² 2 x (1 ... 2.5)1); 2 x (2.5 ... 6)1) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 1 x 10
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (1 ... 2.5)1); 2 x (2.5 ... 6)1)
• AWG cables, solid AWG 2 x (16 ... 12)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (14 ... 10)
• AWG cables, stranded AWG 1x8
• Terminal screws M4 (Pozidriv size 2)
- tightening torque Nm 2 ... 2.5 (18 ... 22 lb.in)
Auxiliary conductors
Conductor cross-section
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1) 0.75) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
• Solid or stranded AWG (2 x) AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)1); 2 x (18 ... 14)1); 1 x 12
• Terminal screws M3
Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductors Cage Clamp terminals
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) • Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point,
both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical crosssections are used,
this restriction does not apply.
Contactor Type LSD232 LSD240 LSD250

Size 2 2 2
General data
Permissible mounting position AC and DC operation 3 6 0 ° 2 2 ,5 ° 2 2 ,5 °
surface.
For DC operation and 22.5 ° inclination towards the front,
operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

DC operation –
Mechanical endurance Basic units Operating 10 million
cycles
contact block

Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20 (terminal compartment IP00),
AC coil assembly IP40,
DC coil assembly IP30
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 finger-safe
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 5/10
• Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 8/10

Size 2 2 2 Page
For short-circuit protection for contactors with thermal overload relays see 45
protection equipment: Thermal overload relays
For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see
protection equipment: Motor protection switches
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG
LV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED
Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 125 125 160
EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 63 63 80
Weld-free1) A 16 16 50
Auxiliary circuit
DIAZED, NEOZED (weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1 kA)
• Miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (short-circuit current Ik ≤ 400 A) A 10
Control
Magnetic coil operating range AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
AC operation, 50 Hz, standard version • Closing VA 104 145
• P.f. 0.78 0.79
• Closed VA 9.7 12.5
• P.f. 0.42 0.36
AC operation, 50/60 Hz, standard version • Closing VA 127/113 170/155
• P.f. 0.73/0.69 0.76/0.72
• Closed VA 11.3/9.5 15/11.8
• P.f. 0.41/0.42 0.35/0.38
AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada • Closing VA 108 150
• P.f. 0.76 0.77
• Closed VA 9.6 12.5
• P.f. 0.42 0.35
• P.f. 0.7 0.71
• Closed VA 10.1 12.6
• P.f. 0.42 0.37
DC operation Closing = Closed W 13.3 13.3
• AC operation mA <12 mA x (230 V/Us) <18 mA x (230 V/Us)
• DC operation mA <38 mA x (24 V/Us) <38 mA x (24 V/Us)
(Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time)
AC operation • Closing delay ms 11 ... 30 10 ... 24
• Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 7 ... 10
DC operation • Closing delay ms 50 ... 95 60 ... 100
• Opening delay ms 20 ... 30 20 ... 25
Arcing time ms 10 10
Operating times for 1.0 x Us2
AC operation • Closing delay ms 13 ... 22 12 ... 20
• Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 7 ... 10
DC operation • Closing delay ms 60 ... 75 70 ... 85
• Opening delay ms 20 ... 30 20 ... 25

2) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode assembly:
2 to 6 times).

Page Size 2 2 2
Main circuit
46 AC capacity
Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 50 60 60
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 45 55 55
Rated power for AC loads1) 230 V kW 18 22 22
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 31 38 38
500 V kW 39 46 46
690 V kW 54 66 66
Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 °C mm² 16 16 16
loads with Ie at 60 °C mm² 10 16 16
690 V A 20 24 24
Rated power for slipring 230 V kW 7.5 11 15
or squirrel-cage motors 400 V kW 15 18.5 22
at 50 and 60 Hz 500 V kW 18.5 22 30
690 V kW 18.5 22 22
Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 320 400 400
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 W 1.8 2.6 5
Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 29 35 41
Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V kW 15 18.5 22
Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 15.6 18.5 24
690 V A 15.6 18.5 24
Rated power for squirrel-cage motors 230 V kW 4.7 5.4 7.3
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 8.2 9.5 12.6
500 V kW 9.8 11.8 15.8
690 V kW 13 15.5 21.8
• Uncorrected,
rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp L 18 W/0.37 A Units 135 162 162
L 36 W/0.43 A Units 116 139 139
L 58 W/0.67 A Units 74 89 89
L 80 W/0.79 A Units 63 75 75
• DUO switching (two-lamp) L 18 W/0.22 A Units 227 (Ⳏ 2 x 227 lamps) 272 (Ⳏ 2 x 272 lamps) 272 (Ⳏ 2 x 272 lamps)
rated power per lamp/capacitance/rated operational current per lamp
L 18 W/4.5 µF/0.11 A Units 78 98 123
L 36 W/4.5 µF/0.21 A Units 78 98 123
L 58 W/7 µF/0.32 A Units 50 63 79
L 80 W/7 µF/0.49 A Units 50 63 73
L 36 W/6.8 µF/0.18 A Units 124 155 194
L 58 W/10 µF/0.29 A Units 77 96 120
L 80 W/10 µF/0.43 A Units 52 65 81
• With solid-state ballast3) two-lamp L 18 W/10 µF/0.18 A Units 124 (Ⳏ 2 x 124 lamps) 155 (Ⳏ 2 x 155 lamps) 194 (Ⳏ 2 x 194 lamps)

Size 2 2 2 Page
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-5b kW 6.0 7.6 9.5
47
Switching incandescent lamps
Per main current path at 230/220 V
• For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 31 36.5 43.2
Rating P
For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 12.3 14.5 17.2
400 V kVA 21.5 25.3 29.9
500 V kVA 26.8 31.6 37.4
690 V kVA 23.9 28.7 28.7
For inrush current n = 30 230 V kVA 8.2 9.7 11.5
400 V kVA 14.3 16.8 20
500 V kVA 17.9 21 24.9
690 V kVA 23.9 28.7 28.7
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows.
Px = Pn30 . 30/x
Utilization category AC-6b
Switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric) AC capacitors
Ambient temperature 40 °C
Rated power for single capacitors or at 230 V kvar 12 15 15
banks of capacitors (minimum inductance 400 V kvar 20 25 25
of 20 µH between capacitors connected 525 V kvar 25 33 33
in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 20 25 25
DC capacity
Switching resistive loads (L/R < 1ms)
• 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 45 55 55
60 V A 20 23 23
110 V A 4.5 4.5 4.5
220 V A 1 1 1
440 V A 0.4 0.4 0.4
600 V A 0.25 0.25 0.25
• 2 conducting paths in series up to 24 V A 45 55 55
60 V A 45 45 45
110 V A 25 25 25
220 V A 5 5 5
440 V A 1 1 1
600 V A 0.8 0.8 0.8
60 V A 45 55 55
110 V A 45 55 55
220 V A 45 45 45
440 V A 2.9 2.9 2.9
600 V A 1.4 1.4 1.4
Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15ms)
60 V A 6 6 6
110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5
220 V A 1 1 1
440 V A 0.1 0.1 0.1
600 V A 0.06 0.06 0.06
60 V A 45 45 45
110 V A 25 25 25
220 V A 5 5 5
440 V A 0.27 0.27 0.27
600 V A 0.16 0.16 0.16
60 V A 45 55 55
110 V A 45 55 55
220 V A 25 25 25
440 V A 0.6 0.6 0.6
600 V A 0.35 0.35 0.35

Page Size 2 2 2
Switching frequency
48 Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour
• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency AC h-1 5000 5000 5000
No-load switching frequency DC h-1 1500 1500 1500
Dependence of the switching frequency AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1200 1200 1000
z ’ on the operational current I ’ AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 750 600 400
and operational voltage U ’: AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 1000 800
z ’ = z . (I e/I ’) . (400 V/U’)1.5 . 1/h AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 250 300 300
• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 15 15 15
Contactor Type LSD2..

Size 2
Screw terminals Main conductors: Screw terminals
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) with box terminal
Front clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25
• Stranded mm² 0.75 ... 35
• Solid mm² 0.75 ... 16
• Ribbon cable conductors mm 6 x 9 x 0.8
(number x width x thickness)
• AWG cables, AWG 18 ... 2
solid or stranded
Rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25
• Stranded mm² 0.75 ... 35
• Solid mm² 0.75 ... 16
• AWG cables, AWG 18 ... 2
solid or stranded
Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 16)
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 16)
• Stranded mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 25)
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 16)
• Ribbon cable conductors mm 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (18 ... 2)
solid or stranded
• Terminal screw M6 (Pozidriv size 2)
- tightening torque Nm 3 ... 4.5 (27 ... 40 lb.in)
Auxiliary conductors:
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)1); 2 x (18 ... 14)1); 1 x 12
Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductors: Cage Clamp terminals
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected)
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• AWG cables, 2 x (24 ... 14)
solid or stranded
1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical crosssections are used, this restriction does not
apply.

Size 3 3 3 Page
General data
Permissible mounting position AC and DC operation 3 6 0 ° 2 2 ,5 ° 2 2 ,5 ° 49
surface.
For DC operation and 22.5 ° inclination towards the front,
operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

DC operation –
cycles
contact block

Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20 (terminal compartment IP00),
AC coil assembly IP40,
DC coil assembly IP30
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 finger-safe
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 6.8/5 and 4/10
• Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10.6/5 and 6.2/10

For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays see
Protection Equipment: Overload Relays
For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see load feeders
Main circuit
• Fuse links gL/gG
- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 250 250
EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 125 160
Weld-free3) A 63 100
Auxiliary circuit
DIAZED, NEOZED (weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1 kA)
• Miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (short-circuit current Ik < 400 A) A 10

Page Size 3 3 3
Control
50 Magnetic coil operating range AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
AC operation, 50 Hz, • Closing VA 218 270
standard version • P.f. 0.61 0.68
• Closed VA 21 22
• P.f. 0.26 0.27
AC operation, 50/60 Hz, • Closing VA 247/211 298/274
standard version • P.f. 0.62/0.57 0.7/0.62
• Closed VA 25/18 27/20
• P.f. 0.27/0.3 0.29/0.31
• P.f. 0.61 0.68
• Closed VA 21 22
• P.f. 0.26 0.27
• P.f. 0.55 0.52
• Closed VA 20 21
• P.f. 0.28 0.29
DC operation Closing = Closed W 15 15
• AC operation < 25 mA x (230 V/Us)
• DC operation < 43 mA x (24 V/Us)
• AC operation Closing delay ms 16 ... 57 17 ... 90
Opening delay ms 10 ... 19 10 ... 25
• DC operation Closing delay ms 90 ... 230 90 ... 230
Opening delay ms 14 ... 20 14 ... 20
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15
• AC operation Closing delay ms 18 ... 34 18 ... 30
Opening delay ms 11 ... 18 11 ... 23
• DC operation Closing delay ms 100 ... 120 100 ... 120
Opening delay ms 16 ... 20 16 ... 20
Main circuit
AC capacity
1000 V A 50 60 70
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 90 100 100
1000 V A 40 50 60
Rated output of AC loads2) at 230 V kW 34 38 38
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 59 66 66
500 V kW 74 82 82
690 V kW 102 114 114
1000 V kW 66 82 98
Minimum conductor cross-section for At 40 °C mm² 35 50 50
loads with IIe At 60 °C mm² 35 35 35
Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3
690 V A 47 58 58
1000 V A 25 30 30
Rated power for slipring at 230 V kW 18.5 22 22
or squirrel-cage motors 400 V kW 30 37 45
at 50 and 60 Hz 500 V kW 37 45 55
690 V kW 45 55 55
1000 V kW 30 37 37
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 W 4.6 7.7 10.8
1) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode assembly:
2 to 6 times).

Size 3 3 3 Page
Main circuit
AC capacity 51
Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V kW 30 37 45
- rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 28 34 42
690 V A 28 34 42
1000 V A 20 23 23
- rated power for squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 8.7 10.4 12
motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 15.1 17.9 22
500 V kW 18.4 22.4 27
690 V kW 25.4 30.9 38
1000 V A 22 30 30
• Uncorrected,
rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp L 18 W/0.37 A Units 270 324
L 36 W/0.43 A Units 232 279
L 58 W/0.67 A Units 149 179
L 80 W/0.79 A Units 126 151
• DUO switching (two-lamp) L 18 W/0.21 A Units 454 (Ⳏ 2 x 454 lamps) 545 (Ⳏ 2 x 545 lamps)
L 36 W/0.42 A Units 238 (Ⳏ 2 x 238 lamps) 285 (Ⳏ 2 x 285 lamps)
rated power per lamp/capacitance/rated operational current per lamp
L 18 W/4.5 µF/0.11 A Units 160 197 234
L 36 W/4.5 µF/0.21 A Units 160 197 234
L 58 W/7 µF/0.32 A Units 103 127 150
L 80 W/7 µF/0.49 A Units 103 126 146
L 36 W/6.8 µF/0.18 A Units 253 311 369
L 58 W/10 µF/0.29 A Units 156 193 229
L 80 W/10 µF/0.43 A Units 105 130 154
• With solid-state ballast1) two-lamp L 18 W/10 µF/0.18 A Units 253 (Ⳏ 2 x 253 lamps) 311 (Ⳏ 2 x 311 lamps) 369 (Ⳏ 2 x 369 lamps)
Switching incandescent lamps
Per main current path at 230/220 V kW 12.3 15.2 18.1

Page Size 3 3 3
Main circuit
52 AC capacity
Rated operational current Ie (60 °C)
• For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 63.5 80 84.4
up to 690 V A 47 58 58
up to 690 V A 42.3 56.3 56.3
Rating P
• For inrush current n = 20 230 V kVA 25.3 31.9 33.6
400 V kVA 43.9 55.4 58
500 V kVA 54.9 69.3 73.1
690 V kVA 56.2 69.3 69.3
• For inrush current n = 30 230 V kV 16.8 22.4 22.4
400 V kVA 29.3 39 39
500 V kVA 36.6 48.7 48.7
690 V kVA 50.3 67.3 67.3
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows.
Px = Pn30 . 30/x
Rated operational currents Ie (60 °C) up to 400 V A 57 72
Rated power for single capacitors or at 230 V kvar 24 29
banks of capacitors (minimum inductance 400 V kvar 40 50
of 6 µH between capacitors connected 525 V kvar 50 65
in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 40 50
DC capacity
Switching resistive load (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
60 V A 23 60 60
110 V A 4.5 9 9
220 V A 1 2 2
440 V A 0.4 0.6 0.6
600 V A 0.26 0.4 0.4
60 V A 90 100 100
110 V A 90 100 100
220 V A 5 10 10
440 V A 1 1.8 1.8
600 V A 0.8 1 1
60 V A 90 100 100
110 V A 90 100 100
220 V A 70 80 80
440 V A 2.9 1.8 4.5
600 V A 1.4 1 2.6
60 V A 6 6.5 6.5
110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5
220 V A 1 1 1
440 V A 0.15 0.15 0.15
600 V A 0.06 0.06 0.06
60 V A 90 100 100
110 V A 90 100 100
220 V A 7 7 7
440 V A 0.42 0.42 0.42
600 V A 0.16 0.16 0.16
60 V A 90 100 100
110 V A 90 100 100
220 V A 35 35 35
440 V A 0.8 0.8 0.8
600 V A 0.35 0.35 0.35

Size 3 3 3 Page
Main circuit
Switching frequency 53
• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency AC h-1 5000 5000 5000
No-load switching frequency DC h-1 1000 1000 1000
Dependence of the switching frequency AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 900 900
z ’ on the operational current I ’ AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 400 400 350
and operational voltage U ’: AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 1000 850
z ’ = z . (I e/I ’) . (400 V/U’)1.5 . 1/h AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 300 300 250
• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 15 15 15
Contactor Type LSD3..

Size 3
Screw terminals Main conductors: Screw terminals
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 4 ... 50
• Stranded mm² 2.5 ... 16
• Solid mm² 4 ... 70
• AWG cables, AWG 10 ... 2/0
solid or stranded
• Stranded mm² 2.5 ... 16
• Solid mm² 10 ... 70
solid or stranded
Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (2.5 ... 35)
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (4 ... 35)
• Stranded mm² 2 x (2.5 ... 16)
• Solid mm² 2 x (4 ... 50)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (10 ... 1/0)
solid or stranded
• Terminal screw M6 (hex. socket, A/F 4)
- tightening torque Nm 4 ... 6 (36 ... 53 lb.in)
Connection for drilled copper bars1) Max. width mm 10
Without box terminal with • Finely stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 503)
cable lugs2) • Stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 703)
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) • AWG cables, AWG 7 ... 1/0
solid or stranded
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4) 0.75) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)4); 2 x (18 ... 14)4); 1 x 12
solid or stranded
Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductors: Cage Clamp terminals
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)
solid or stranded
1) If bars larger than 12 x 10 mm are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance (on request).
2) If conductors larger than 25 mm2 are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance (on request).
3) Only with crimped cable lugs according to DIN 46234. Cable lug max. 20 mm wide.
apply.

Page Size 6 6 6
General data
54 Permissible mounting position
2 2 ,5 ° 2 2 ,5 °
The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface. 9 0 ° 9 0 °
Mechanical endurance Operating 10 million

cycles

Mirror contacts Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed
Permissible ambient temperature During operation °C -25 ... +60/+55 with AS-Interface
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP00/open, coil assembly IP20
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe with cover
Shock resistance Rectangular pulse g/ms 8.5/5 and 4.2/10
Sine pulse g/ms 13.4/5 and 6.5/10
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 3)
Short-circuit protection
Main circuit For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays see
Fuse links, gL/gG Protection Equipment: Overload Relays
- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ • Type of coordination "1" A 355 355
EN 60947-4-1 • Type of coordination "2" A 315 315
• Weld-free4) A 80 160
Auxiliary circuit
DIAZED, NEOZED
• Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (Ik < 400 A)
3) See second page of chapter Technical Specifications “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)“.


Contactor Type LSD6.
Size 6 Page
Control
Operating range of the solenoid AC/DC (UC) 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max 55
Power consumption of the solenoid
when coil is cool and rated range Us min ... Us max)
• Conventional operating mechanism
- AC operation Closing at Us min VA/p.f. 250/0.9
Closing at Us max VA/p.f. 300/0.9
Closed at Us min VA/p.f. 4.8/0.8
Closed at Us max VA/p.f. 5.8/0.8
- DC operation Closing at Us min W 300
Closing at Us max W 360
Closed at Us min W 4.3
Closed at Us max W 5.2
PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) 24 V DC/≤ 30 mA power consumption,
(operating range 17 ... 30 V DC)
Operating times (Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time)
- with 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max Closing delay ms 20 ... 95
- with Us min ... Us max Closing delay ms 25 ... 50
Arcing time ms 10 ... 15

Page Size 6 6 6
Main circuit
56 AC capacity
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 140 160 185
at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 80 90 100
Rated power for AC loads1) at 230 V kW 53 60 70
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 92 105 121
500 V kW 115 131 152
690 V kW 159 181 210
1000 V kW 131 148 165
Minimum conductor cross-section for At 40 °C mm² 70 95 95
loads with Ie At 60 °C mm² 50 70 95
690 V A 115 150 170
1000 V A 53 65 65
Rated power of slipring at 230 V kW 37 50 61
or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 64 84 104
500 V kW 81 105 132
690 V kW 113 146 167
1000 V kW 75 90 90
Power loss per main current path at Ie/AC-3/500 V W 7 9 13
Rated power for squirrel-cage at 400 V kW 55 75 90
motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz
690 V A 48 57 65
1000 V A 34 38 42
- rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 230 V kW 16 20 25
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 29 38 45
500 V kW 37 47 57
690 V kW 48 55 65
1000 V kW 49 55 60
• For inrush current n = 20 up to 690 V A 115 148 148
Rating P
• For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 45 58 58
400 V kVA 79 102 102
500 V kVA 99 128 128
690 V kVA 137 176 176
1000 V kVA 80 98 117
400 V kVA 62 68 68
500 V kVA 77 85 85
690 V kVA 107 118 118
1000 V kVA 80 98 117
Px = Pn 30 . 30/x
Rated power for single capacitors or at 230 V kvar 42 50 58
banks of capacitors (minimum 400 V kvar 72 86 100
inductance of 6 μH between capacitors 500 V kvar 90 108 125
connected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz 690 V kvar 72 86 100
2) According to IEC 60947-4-1.

Size 6 6 6 Page
Main circuit
DC capacity 57
60 V A 160
110 V A 18
220 V A 3.4
440 V A 0.8
600 V A 0.5
60 V A 160
110 V A 160
220 V A 20
440 V A 3.2
600 V A 1.6
60 V A 160
110 V A 160
220 V A 160
440 V A 11.5
600 V A 4
60 V A 7.5
110 V A 2.5
220 V A 0.6
440 V A 0.17
600 V A 0.12
60 V A 160
110 V A 160
220 V A 2.5
440 V A 0.65
600 V A 0.37
60 V A 160
110 V A 160
220 V A 160
440 V A 1.4
600 V A 0.75
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency h-1 2000 2000
Dependence of the switching AC-1 h-1 800 800
frequency z' on the operational AC-2 h-1 400 300
current I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-3 h-1 1000 750
z’ = z (Ie/I ’) (400 V/U’ )1.5 1/h AC-4 h-1 130 130
Contactor Type LSD6

Page Size 6
Conductor cross-sections of main conductors
58 Screw terminals Main conductors: Screw terminals
without box terminal/busbar connection
(box terminals on request)
• Finely stranded with cable lug1) mm² 16 ... 95
• Stranded with cable lug1) mm² 25 ... 120
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 4 ... 250 kcmil
• Connecting bar (max. width) mm 17
• Terminal screw M8 x 25 (A/F 13)
- Tightening torque Nm 10 ... 14 (89 ... 124 lb.in)
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2) 0.75) acc. to IEC 60947;
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• Terminal screw M3 (PZ 2)
Cage Clamp terminals Auxiliary conductors: Cage Clamp terminals
(on request) • Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24...14)
1) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46235, use LSZ6 D001 terminal cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm² to ensure phase spacing.
2) Iftwo different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not
apply.

Contactor Type LSDE22 LSDE26 LSDE30
Size 10 10 10 Page
General data
Permissible mounting position 59
The contactors are designed for 2 2 ,5 ° 2 2 ,5 °
operation on a vertical mounting 9 0 ° 9 0 °
surface.

cycles

Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG
- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ • Type of coordination "1" A 500
EN 60947-4-1 • Type of coordination "2" A 400
• Weld-free4) A 250
Auxiliary circuit
DIAZED, NEOZED
Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic


Page Size 10 10 10
Control
60 Operating range of the solenoid AC/DC (UC) 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max
(when coil is cool and rated range Us min ... Us max)
Closed at Us max W 7.4
PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) (on request) 24 V DC/≤ 30 mA power consumption, (operating range 17 ... 30 V DC)
Operating times (Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time)
- for Us min ... Us max Closing delay ms 35 ... 50

Size 10 10 10 Page
Main circuit
AC capacity 61
Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 275 330
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 250 300
at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 100 150
Rated power for AC loads1) at 230 V kW 94 113
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 164 197
500 V kW 205 246
690 V kW 283 340
1000 V kW 164 246
Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 °C mm2 150 185
loads with Ie at 60 °C mm2 120 185
690 V A 225 265 280
1000 V A 68 95 95
Rated power of slipring at 230 V kW 73 85 97
or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 128 151 171
500 V kW 160 189 215
690 V kW 223 265 280
1000 V kW 90 132 132
Power loss per main current path at Ie/AC-3/500 V W 17 18 22
Rated power for squirrel-cage at 400 V kW 110 132 160
690 V A 85 105 115
1000 V A 42 57 57
- rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 230 V kW 30 37 40
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 54 66 71
500 V kW 67 82 87
690 V kW 82 102 112
1000 V kW 59 80 80
Rating power P
400 V kVA 157 183 189
500 V kVA 196 229 236
690 V kVA 271 317 326
1000 V kVA 117 164 164
400 V kVA 105 126 126
500 V kVA 130 158 158
690 V kVA 180 217 217
1000 V kVA 117 164 164
Px = Pn 30 . 30/x
Rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 183 200
banks of capacitors (minimum 400 V kvar 127 152
inductance of 6 μH between capacitors 500 V kvar 159 191
connected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz 690 V kvar 127 152

Page Size 10 10 10
Main circuit
62 DC capacity
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 18 33
220 V A 3.4 3.8
440 V A 0.8 0.9
600 V A 0.5 0.6
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 200 300
220 V A 20 300
440 V A 3.2 4
600 V A 1.6 2
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 200 300
220 V A 200 300
440 V A 11.5 11
600 V A 4 5.2
60 V A 7.5 11
110 V A 2.5 3
220 V A 0.6 0.6
440 V A 0.17 0.18
600 V A 0.12 0.125
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 200 300
220 V A 2.5 2.5
440 V A 0.65 0.65
600 V A 0.37 0.37
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 200 300
220 V A 200 300
440 V A 1.4 1.4
600 V A 0.75 0.75
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency h-1 2000 2000 2000
Dependence of the switching AC-1 h-1 800 800 750
frequency z' on the operational AC-2 h-1 250 300 250
current I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-3 h-1 500 700 500
z’ = z (Ie/I’) (400 V/U’ )1.5 .1/h AC-4 h-1 130 130 130
Contactor Type LSDE.

Size 10 Page
Screw terminals Main conductors: 63
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
1) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN46234 for conductor cross-sections of 185 mm² and more and according to DIN46235 for conductor cross-sections of 240 mm² and more, the
LSZED001 terminal cover must be used to keep the phase clearance.
apply.

Contactor Type LSDG41 LSDG51
Page Size 12 12
General data
64 Permissible mounting position
The contactors are designed for 2 2 ,5 ° 2 2 ,5 °
operation on a vertical mounting 9 0 ° 9 0 °
surface.

cycles

Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG
• Weld-free3) A 250 315
Auxiliary circuit
DIAZED, NEOZED
or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic


Size 12 12 Page
Control
Operating range of the solenoid AC/DC (UC) 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max 65
(when coil is cool and rated range Us min ... Us max)
Closed at Us max W 10
PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) (on request) 24 V DC/≤ 30 mA power consumption, (operating range 17 ... 30 V DC)
Operating times
- for Us min ... Us max Closing delay ms 50 ... 70

Page Size 12 12
Main circuit
66 AC capacity
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 400 550
at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 200 200
Rated power for AC loads1) at 230 V kW 151 208
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 263 362
500 V kW 329 452
690 V kW 454 624
1000 V kW 329 329
Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 °C mm2 2 x 150 2 x 185
loads with Ie at 60 °C mm2 240 2 x 185
690 V A 400 450
1000 V A 180 180
Rated power of slipring at 230 V kW 132 164
or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 231 291
500 V kW 291 363
690 V kW 400 453
1000 V kW 250 250
Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 3200 4000
Power loss per main current path at Ie/AC-3/500 V W 35 55
Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 350 430
Rated power for squirrel-cage at 400 V kW 200 250
- rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 150 175
690 V A 135 150
1000 V A 80 80
- rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 230 V kW 48 56
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 85 98
500 V kW 105 123
690 V kW 133 148
1000 V kW 113 113
• For inrush current n = 20 up to 690 V A 377 404
• For inrush current n = 30 up to 690 V A 251 270
Rating power P
• For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 150 161
400 V kVA 261 280
500 V kVA 326 350
690 V kVA 450 483
1000 V kVA 311 311
• For inrush current n = 30 at 230 V kVA 100 107
400 V kVA 173 187
500 V kVA 217 234
690 V kVA 300 323
1000 V kVA 311 311
Px = Pn 30 . 30/x
banks of capacitors (minimum 400 V kvar 199 282
inductance of 6 μH between capacitors 500 V kvar 248 352
connected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz 690 V kvar 199 282

Size 12 12 Page
Main circuit
DC capacity 67
60 V A 330
110 V A 33
220 V A 3.8
440 V A 0.9
600 V A 0.6
60 V A 400
110 V A 400
220 V A 400
440 V A 4
600 V A 2
60 V A 400
110 V A 400
220 V A 400
440 V A 11
600 V A 5.2
60 V A 11
110 V A 3
220 V A 0.6
440 V A 0.18
600 V A 0.125
60 V A 400
110 V A 400
220 V A 2.5
440 V A 0.65
600 V A 0.37
60 V A 400
110 V A 400
220 V A 400
440 V A 1.4
600 V A 0.75
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency h-1 2000 2000
Dependence of the switching AC-1 h-1 700 500
frequency z' on the operational AC-2 h-1 200 170
current I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-3 h-1 500 420
z’ = z (Ie/I ’) (400 V/U’ )1.5 1/h AC-4 h-1 130 130
Contactor Type LSDG.

Page Size 12
68 Screw terminals Main conductors:
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
1) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN46234 for conductor cross-sections of 185 mm² and more and according to DIN46235 for conductor cross-sections of 240 mm² and more, the
LSZED001 terminal cover must be used to keep the phase clearance.
apply.

Contactor Type LSSD07 LSSD09 LSSD12 LSS012 LSS017 LSS025
LSDD07 LSDD09 LSDD12 LSD009 LSD012 LSD017 LSD025 Page
Size 00 00 00 0 0 0 0
CSA and UL rated data 69
Rated insulation voltage V AC 600 600
Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C Open and enclosed A 20 35
Maximum horsepower ratings
(CSA and UL approved values)
Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp 1.5 2 3 2 3 5 7.5
at 60 Hz 230 V hp 2 3 3 3 3 5 7.5
460 V hp 3 5 7.5 5 7.5 10 15
575 V hp 5 7.5 10 7.5 10 15 20
Short-circuit protection at 600 V kA 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
(contactor or overload relay) CLASS RK5 fuse A 60 60 60 70 70 70 100
Circuit breakers with overload A 50 50 50 70 70 70 100
protection acc. to UL 489
Combination motor controllers type E acc. to UL 508
At 480 V Type -- -- -- BES0
A -- -- -- 8 10 16 22
kA -- -- -- 65 65 65 65
At 600 V Type -- -- -- BES0
A -- -- -- 8 10 12.5 12.5
kA -- -- -- 25 25 25 25
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 0 -- 1
Uninterrupted current Open A -- 18 -- 27
Enclosed A -- 18 -- 27
Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp -- 3 -- 7.5
at 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 3 -- 7.5
460 V hp -- 5 -- 10
575 V hp -- 5 -- 10
Thermal Overload relays Type LSTD LST0
Setting range A 0.11 ... 12 1.8 ... 25
Contactor Type LSD232 LSD240 LSD250 LSD365 LSD380 LSD395

Size 2 2 2 3 3 3
CSA and UL rated data
Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C Open and enclosed A 45 55 50 90 105 105
Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp 10 10 15 20 25 30
at 60 Hz 230 V hp 10 15 15 25 30 30
460 V hp 25 30 40 50 60 75
575 V hp 30 40 50 60 75 100
Short-circuit protection at 600 V kA 5 5 5 10 10 10
(contactor or overload relay) CLASS RK5 fuse A 125 150 200 250 300 350
Circuit breakers with overload A 125 150 200 250 300 400
Combination motor controllers type E acc. to UL 508
At 480 V Type BES2 BES3
A 32 40 50 63 75 100
kA 65 65 65 65 65 65
At 600 V Type BES3 BES3
A 32 40 50 63 75 75
kA 25 25 25 30 30 30
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 2 -- 3
Uninterrupted current Open A -- 45 -- 90
Enclosed A -- 45 -- 90
Rated power at 200 V hp -- 10 -- 25
for induction motors with 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 15 -- 30
460 V hp -- 25 -- 50
575 V hp -- 25 -- 50
Thermal Overload relays Type LST2 LST3
Setting range A 5.5 ... 50 18 ... 100

Contactor Size 00 0 ... 12
Page Screw terminals and Screw terminals and Screw terminals and
Cage Clamp terminals Cage Clamp terminals Cage Clamp terminals
70 Integrated or 1- and 4-pole Laterally
snap-on snap-on mountable
auxiliary contact block auxiliary contact block auxiliary contact block
CSA and UL rated data for the auxiliary contacts
Rated voltage V AC 600 600 600
Switching capacity A 600, Q 600 A 600, Q 600 A 300, Q 300
Uninterrupted current
at 240 V AC A 10 10 10
Contactor Type LSD611 LSD615 LSD619 LSDE22 LSDE26 LSDE30

Size 6 6 6 10 10 10
Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C Open and enclosed A 140 195 195 250 330 330
Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp 40 50 60 60 75 100
at 60 Hz 230 V hp 50 60 75 75 100 125
460 V hp 100 125 150 150 200 250
575 V hp 125 150 200 200 250 300
Short-circuit protection at 600 V kA 10 10 10 10 18 18
CLASS RK5/L fuse A 450 500 500 700 800 800
Circuit breakers with overload A 350 450 500 500 700 800
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 4 -- -- -- 5
Uninterrupted current Open A -- 150 -- -- -- 300
Enclosed A -- 135 -- -- -- 270
Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp -- 40 -- -- -- 75
with 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 50 -- -- -- 100
460 V hp -- 100 -- -- -- 200
575 V hp -- 100 -- -- -- 200

Size 12 12
Rated insulation voltage V AC 600
Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C Open and enclosed A 400 540
Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp 125 150
at 60 Hz 230 V hp 150 200
460 V hp 300 400
575 V hp 400 500
Short-circuit protection at 600 V kA 18 30
CLASS L fuse A 1000 1200
Circuit breakers with overload A 900 900
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 6
Uninterrupted current Open A -- 600
Enclosed A -- 540
Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp -- 150
with 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 200
460 V hp -- 400
575 V hp -- 400
W LSDH VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 335 ... 450 kW – OVERVIEW

IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
The LSDH contactors are climate-proof. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Terminal covers may have to be Page
fitted onto the connecting bars, depending on the configuration with other devices (see chapter “Products and order
numbers” – terminal covers).
71
W FUNCTION
W MAIN CONTACTS
Contact erosion indication with LSDH 6/8 vacuum contactors
The contact erosion of the vacuum interrupters can be checked during operation with the help of 3 white double slides
on the contactor base. If the distance indicated by one of the double slides is < 0.5 mm while the contactor is in the closed
position, the vacuum interrupter must be replaced. To ensure maximum reliability, it is recommended to replace all 3
vacuum interrupters.
W AUXILIARY CONTACTS
Contact reliability
The auxiliary contacts are suitable for solid-state circuits
• With currents ≥ 1 mA
• And voltages from 17 V.
W SURGE SUPPRESSION
Control circuit
Protection of coils against overvoltages:
AC operation
• Fitted with varistors as standard
DC operation
Retrofitting options:
• With varistors
If LSDH 6/8 is to be used for DC operation, an additional reversing contactor is required; this is included in the scope of
supply in the same packaging as the vacuum contactor.
W ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC)

LSDH 6/8 contactors for AC operation are fitted with an electronically controlled solenoid operating mechanism with a
high interference immunity.
Contactor Rated control Overvoltage Degree of Overvoltage

type supply type severity strength
voltage Us (IEC 60801) (IEC 60801)
LSDH6. 110 ... 132 V Burst 3 2 kV
LSDHB. Surge 4 6 kV
200 ... 277 V Burst 4 4 kV
Surge 4 5 kV
380 ... 600 V Burst 4 4 kV
Surge 4 6 kV
Note:
During operation in installations in which the emitted interference limits cannot be observed, e.g. when used for output
contactors in converters, LSDH6/8 contactors without a main conductor path circuit are recommended (see description
next page).
W LSDH VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 335 ... 450 kW – OVERVIEW
W APPLICATION
Page The standard LSDH6. and LSDHB. contactors with electronically controlled contactor mechanism, have high resistance to
72 electromagnetic interference.
Causes for such interference can be, for example:

• Frequency converters which are operated nearby can cause periodic overvoltages at the control level of the contactors.
• High-energy pulses cause by switching operations and atmospheric discharges can cause interference on the control
cables.
To reduce interference voltages caused by frequency converters, the manufacturer recommends the use of e.g. input
filters, output filters, grounding or shielding in the installation.
Further measures that should be applied for overvoltage damping:

• Feeding the contactors using control transformer according to EN 60204 - rather than directly from the network
• Use of surge arresters, if required
W CONNECTION
Control circuit
The rectifier bridge is connected to varistors for protection against overvoltages. The built-in rectifier bridge affords
sufficient protection for the coils.
Main circuit
As standard LSDH. contactors with integrated RC varistors.
W PROTECTION OF THE MAIN CURRENT PATHS

An integrated RC varistor connection for the main current paths of the contactors dampens the switching overvoltage
rises to safe values. This prevents multiple restriking. The operator of an installation can therefore rest assured that the
motor winding cannot be damaged by switching overvoltages with steep voltage rises.
Important note:
The overvoltage damping circuit is not required if LSDH 6/8 contactors are used in circuits with DC choppers, frequency
converters or speed-variable operating mechanisms, for example. It could be damaged by the voltage peaks and
harmonics which are generated. This may cause phase-to-phase short-circuits in the contactors.
Solution:
Order special contactor version without overvoltage damping. (on request)
W LSDH VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 335 ... 450 kW

Contactor Type LSDH6 and LSDH8
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts Acc. to IEC 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200) Page
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
(degree of pollution 3) 73
Continuous thermal current A 10
Ith =Rated operational current Ie/AC-12
AC load
Rated operational current Ie/AC-15/AC-14
for rated operational voltage Ue
24 V A 10
110 V A 10
125 V A 10
220 V A 6
230 V A 5.6
380 V A 4
400 V A 3.6
500 V A 2.5
660 V A 2.5
690 V A 2.3
DC load
24 V A 10
60 V A 10
110 V A 3.2
125 V A 2.5
220 V A 0.9
440 V A 0.33
600 V A 0.22
24 V A 10
60 V A 5
110 V A 1.14
125 V A 0.98
220 V A 0.48
440 V A 0.13
600 V A 0.07
CSA and UL rated data for the auxiliary contacts
Rated voltage V AC, 600
max.
Switching capacity A 600, P 600

Page
The contact endurance for utilization category AC-12 or AC-15/AC-14 depends mainly on LSDH6 and LSDH8 contactors at 230 V AC
74 the breaking current. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly,
4
i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system.
3
2
Operating
107
8
6
4
3
2
6
10
8
6
4
3
2
5
10
10 -2 2 3 4 6 8 10-1 2 3 4 6 8 10 0 2 3 4 6 8 10 1 2
Ia ( A )
Contact erosion indication with LSDH6 and LSDH8 vacuum contactors
The contact erosion of the vacuum interrupters can be checked during operation with the help of 3 white double slides on the contactor base.
If the distance indicated by one of the double slides is < 0.5 mm while the contactor is in the closed position, the vacuum interrupter must be replaced. To ensure maximum reliability, it is rec-
ommended to replace all 3 vacuum interrupters.
LSDH6 LSDH8
LSDH6 and LSDH8 contactors

Legend for the diagrams:

Contactor Type LSDH6 LSDH8
Size 14 14 Page
General data
Permissible mounting position, AC operation and DC operation
2 2 ,5 ° 2 2 ,5 °
75
installation instructions1) 2) 9 0 ° 9 0 °
surface.
cycles
Electrical endurance Operating 3)
cycles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) kV 1
Safe isolation between the coil and the main contacts kV 1
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 8.1/5 and 4.7/10 9.5/5 and 5.7/10
DC operation g/ms 9/5 and 5.7/10 8.6/5 and 5.1/10
• Sine pulse AC operation g/ms 12.8/5 and 7.4/10 13.5/5 and 7.8/10
DC operation g/ms 14.4/5 and 9.1/10 13.5/5 and 7.8/10
Conductor cross-sections See Conductor Cross-Sections page 78
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG
• Weld-free5) A 400 500
Auxiliary circuit
(weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1kA)
• Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (Ik < 400 A) A 10
1) To easily replace the laterally mounted auxiliary switches it is recommended to maintain a minimum distance of 30 mm between the contactors.
2) If mounted at a 90° angle (conducting paths are horizontally above each other), the switching frequency is reduced by 80 % compared with the normal values.
3) See page before “Endurance of the auxiliary contacts”.
4) See first page of chapter Technical Specifications – LSDH vacuum contactors “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)“.


Page Size 14 14
Control
76 Magnetic coil operating range 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max
• AC operation, Us max - Closing VA/p.f. 1850/1 950/0.98
- Closed VA/p.f. 49/0.15 30.6/0.31
• AC operation, Us min - Closing VA/p.f. 1200/1 600/0.98
- Closed VA/p.f. 13.5/0.47 12.9/0.43
• DC economy circuit1) - Closing at 24 V W 1010 960
- Closed W 28 20.6
Operating times at 0,8 ... 1.1 x Us (Values apply to cold and warm coil)
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 70 ... 120 (22 ... 65)2) 80 ... 120
- Opening delay ms 70 ... 100 70 ... 80
• DC economy circuit - Closing delay ms 76 ... 110 86 ... 280
- Opening delay ms 50 19 ... 25
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10
Operating times at 1.0 x Us
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 80 ... 100 (30 ... 45)2) 85 ... 100
- Opening delay ms 70 ... 100 70
• DC economy circuit - Closing delay ms 80 ... 90 90 ... 125
- Opening delay ms 50 19 ... 25
Minimum command duration Standard ms 120 120
for closing Reduced make-time ms 90 --
Minimum interval time between two ON commands ms 100 300
1) At 24 V DC; for further voltages, deviations of up to ±10 % are possible.

2) Values in brackets apply to contactors with reduced operating times.

Size 14 14 Page
Main circuit
AC capacity 77
at 55 °C up to 690 V A 630 850
at 55 °C up to 1000 V A 450 800
Rated power for AC loads 230 V kW 240 323
with p.f. = 0.95 at 55°C 400 V kW 415 558
500 V kW 545 735
690 V kW 720 970
1000 V kW 780 1385
Minimum conductor cross-sections for loads at 40°C mm² 2 x 240 Ie ≥ 800 A: 2 x 60 x 5 (Cu busbars)
with Ie at 55°C mm² 2 x 185 Ie < 800 A: 2 x 240
1000 V A 435 580
Rated power for slipring or squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 200 260
motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 347 450
500 V kW 434 600
690 V kW 600 800
1000 V kW 600 800
Rated operational current Ie up to 690 V A 610 690
Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with 50 at 400 V kW 355 400
Hz and 60 Hz

1000 V A 210 250
Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 230 V kW 97 110
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 168 191
500 V1) kW 210 250
690 V1) kW 278 335
1000 V1) A 290 350
Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V
• For inrush current n = 20 A 513 675
• For inrush current n = 30 A 342 450
Rating P
For inrush current n = 20 230 V kVA 195 256
400 V kVA 338 445
500 V kVA 444 584
690 V kVA 586 771
1000 V kVA 752 1003
For inrush current n = 302) 230 V kVA 130 171
400 V kVA 226 297
500 V kVA 296 389
690 V kVA 390 514
1000 V kVA 592 778
Utilization category AC-6b,
switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric)
AC capacitors
Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 433
Rated power for single capacitors at 230 V kvar 175
at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kvar 300
500 V kvar 400
690 V kvar 300
Rated power for banks of capacitors (minimum at 230 V kvar 145
inductance is 6 H between capacitors connected 400 V kvar 250
in parallel) at 50 and 60 Hz 500 V kvar 333
690 V kvar 250
1) Max. permissible rated operational current Ie/AC-4 = Ie/AC-3 up to 500 V, for reduced contact endurance and reduced switching frequency.
2) For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows: Px = Pn30 . 30/x.

Page Size 14 14
Main circuit
78 AC capacity
Short-time current carrying capacity (5 ... 30 s)
• CLASS 5 and 10 A 630 820
• CLASS 15 A 630 662
• CLASS 20 A 536 572
• CLASS 25 A 479 531
• CLASS 30 A 441 500
Thermal current-carrying capacity 10-s-current1) A 5040 7000
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 /690 V W 45 70
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency AC 1/h 2000 1000
No-load switching frequency DC 1/h 1000 1000
AC-1 1/h 700 700
AC-2 1/h 200 200
AC-3 1/h 500 500
AC-4 1/h 150 150
• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) 1/h 15 15
• Screw terminals Main conductors: Screw terminals
• Busbar connections
- finely stranded with cable lug mm² 50 ... 240 50 ... 240
- stranded with cable lug mm² 70 ... 240 50 ... 240
- solid or stranded AWG 2/0 ... 500 MCM 2/0 ... 500 MCM
- connecting bar (max. width) mm 50 60 (Ue ≤ 690 V)
50 (Ue > 690 V)
• Terminal screw M10 x 30 M12 x 40
- tightening torque Nm 14 ... 24 (124 ... 210 lb.in) 20 ... 35 (177 ... 310 lb.in)
• With box terminal (on request)
- connectable copper bars
- width mm 15 ... 25 15 ... 38
- max. thickness mm 1 x 26 or 2 x 11 1 x 46 or 2 x 18
- terminal screw A/F 6 (hexagon socket) A/F 8 (hexagon socket)
- tightening torque Nm 25 ... 40 (221 ... 354 lb.in) 35 ... 50 (266 ... 443 lb.in)
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1)2)/2 x (1 ... 2.5)2)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1)2)/2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2)
• Pin-end connector to DIN 46231 mm² 2 x (1 ... 1.5)
• Solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 12)
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.4 (7 ... 12 lb.in)
Uninterrupted current Open and enclosed A 630 820
Rated power for induction motors at at 200 V hp 231 290
60 Hz
230 V hp 266 350
460 V hp 530 700
575 V hp 664 860
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
SIZE hp 6 7
Uninterrupted current Open A 600 820
Enclosed A 540 810
Rated power for induction motors at at 200 V hp 150 --
60 Hz 230 V hp 200 300
460 V hp 400 600
575 V hp 400 600

2) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical crosssections are used, this restriction does not
apply.
W LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING RESISTIVE LOADS – OVERVIEW

W AC OPERATION
According to EN60947-4-1 (VDE0660 Part102).The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe Page
according to EN50274. The accessories for the 3-pole ALEA contactors can also be used for the 4-pole versions.
79
W FUNCTION
• Switching resistive loads
• Isolating systems with ungrounded or poorly grounded neutral conductors
• System transfers when alternative AC power supplies are used
• As contactors, e.g.for variable-speed operating mechanisms which only have to carry current and not switch
W INTEGRATION
W MOUNTABLE AUXILIARY CONTACTS
Size 00
Maximum 4 auxiliary contacts.
Size 0
Maximum 2 auxiliary contacts (either laterally mounted or snapped onto the top).
Size 2–3
Maximum 4 auxiliary contacts (either laterally mounted or snapped onto the top).
W CONTACTOR ASSEMBLY WITH MECHANICAL INTERLOCK

The 4-pole LSR contactors with 4NO contacts as the main contacts are suitable for making contactor assemblies with a
mechanical interlock, e.g.for system transfers.
Size 00
Contactor assemblies can be constructed from two LSRD contactors in conjunction with mechanical interlocks and two
connecting clips (Order No.: LSZDW002).
Size 0
When constructing 4-pole contactor assemblies from two LSR0 contactors, the fourth pole of the left contactor must
always be moved to the left side. If the laterally mountable LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock is used, the contactor
assembly is connected with LSZ0W004 (2 pcs.).
Sizes 2 and 3
Contactor assemblies can be constructed from two LSR2 or two LSR3 contactors in conjunction with the laterally mount-
able LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock and the LSZ2W002 for size 2 or LSZ3W002 for size 3.
W LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING RESISTIVE LOADS (AC-1)

4-POLE, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A
Page Contactor Type LSRD18 LSRD22 LSR035 LSR040 LSR260 LSR311 LSR314
Size 00 0 2 3 3
80 General data
Permissible mounting position1)
Mechanical endurance Operating 30 million 10 million
cycles
Electrical endurance at Ie/AC-1 Operating Approx. 0.5 million
cycles
Rated insulation voltage U i V 690
(degree of pollution 3)
Permissible ambient temperature During operation °C –25 ... +60
During storage °C –55 ... +80
Degree of protection Device Operating IP20 IP20
Acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C Connection range cycles IP00
Short-circuit protection of contactors without thermal overload relays
Main circuit
Fuse links, Type of coordination „1“1) A 35 63 160 250 250
gL/gG operational class Type of coordination „2“1) A 20 25/35 63 125 160
LV HRC, DIAZED,
NEOZED
- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Weld-free A 10 16 50 63 100
EN 60947-4-1
Control
Magnetic coil operating range
AC at 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
AC at 60 Hz 0.85 ...1.1 x Us
DC at 50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
DC at 60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Power consumption of the magnetic coils
(when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)
AC operation, 50 Hz • Closing VA 61 145 270
• P.f. VA 0.82 0.79 0.68
• Closed VA 7.8 12.5 22
• P.f. VA 0.24 0.36 0.27
AC operation, 50/60 Hz • Closing VA 26.5/24.3 64/63 170/155 298/274
• P.f. 0.79/0.75 0.82/0.74 0.76/0.72 0.72/0.62
• Closed VA 4.4/3.4 8.4/6.8 15/11.8 27/20
• P.f. 0.27/0.27 0.24/0.28 0.35/0.38 0.29/0.31
DC operation • Closing W 3.3 5.6 13.3 15
= Closed
• DC operation Closing delay ms 25 ... 100 30 ... 90 50 ... 110 110 ... 200
Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 13 ... 40 15 ... 30 14 ... 20
• AC operation Closing delay ms 8 ... 35 6 ... 30 4 ... 35 20 ... 50
Opening delay ms 4 ... 30 13 ... 25 10 ... 30 10 ... 25
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-1, switching resistive loads
Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C, up to 690 V A 18 22 35 40 60 110 140
at 60 °C, up to 690 V A 16 20 30 35 55 100 120
Rated power for AC loads at 230 V kW 7 8.5 12.5 15 23 42 53
P.f. = 0.95 (at 40 °C) 400 V kW 12 14.5 22 26 39 72 92
Minimum conductor cross-section at 40 °C mm² 2.5 2.5 10 10 16 50 50
for loads with Ie at 60 °C mm² 2.5 2.5 10 10 16 50 50
Rated operational currents Ie at 60°C, up to 400 V A 9 12 17 25 26 -- --
Rated power of slipring at 230 V kW 3 3 4 5.5 5.5 -- --
or squirrel-cage motors 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 11 -- --
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz
1) In accordance with the corresponding 3-pole LSD contactors.
2) With size S00, DC operation: Operating times at 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.

4-POLE, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A
Contactor Type LSRD18 LSRD22 LSR035 LSR040 Page
Size 00 0
Main circuit 81
DC capacity
Utilization category DC-1, switching resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
Rated operational currents Ie (at 40 °C)
60 V A 18 22 20
110 V A 2.1 2.1 4.5
220 V A 0.8 0.8 1
440 V A 0.6 0.6 0.4
60 V A 18 22 35
110 V A 12 12 35
220 V A 1.6 1.6 5
440 V A 0.8 0.8 1
60 V A 18 22 35
110 V A 18 22 35
220 V A 18 22 35
440 V A 1.3 1.3 2.9
60 V A 18 22 35
110 V A 18 22 35
220 V A 18 22 35
440 V A 1.3 1.3 2.9
Utilization category DC-3/DC-5
60 V A 0.5 0.5 5
110 V A 0.15 0.15 2.5
220 V A -- -- 1
440 V A -- -- 0.09
60 V A 5 5 35
110 V A 0.35 0.35 15
220 V A -- -- 3
440 V A -- -- 0.27
60 V A 18 20 35
110 V A 18 20 35
220 V A 1.5 1.5 10
440 V A 0.2 0.2 0.6
60 V A 18 20 35
110 V A 18 20 35
220 V A 1.5 1.5 35
440 V A 0.2 0.2 0.6
Maximum breaking current AC
e.g. for isolation of load distributions
• 50/60 Hz 400 V A 72 96 200

4-POLE, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A
Page
Contactor Type LSR260 LSR311 LSR314
82 Main circuit
Size 2 3 3
DC capacity
Utilization category DC-1, switching resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
60 V A 23 23 60
110 V A 4.5 4.5 9
220 V A 1 1 2
440 V A 0.4 0.4 0.6
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 5 5 10
440 V A 1 1 1.8
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 45 70 80
440 V A 2.9 2.9 4.5
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 45 70 80
440 V A 2.9 2.9 4.5
Utilization category DC-3/DC-5
60 V A 6 6 6.5
110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5
220 V A 1 1 1
440 V A 0.1 0.15 0.15
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 25 70 80
220 V A 5 7 7
440 V A 0.27 0.42 0.42
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 25 35 35
440 V A 0.6 0.8 0.8
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 45 70 80
440 V A 0.6 0.8 0.8
Maximum breaking current AC
e.g. for isolation of load distributions
• 50/60 Hz 400 V A 400 520 760
W LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, 4-POLE

Contactor Type LSH
Size 00 Page
Permissible mounting position
The contactors are designed for operation AC and DC operation
3 6 0 ° 2 2 ,5 ° 2 2 ,5 °
83
on a vertical mounting surface.
Upright mounting position AC operation
Special version required

DC operation Standard version
Positively-driven operation of contacts in contactor relays
LSH: Explanations:
Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary contact block as well as between the There is positively-driven operation if it is ensured that the NC and NO
basic unit and the snap-on auxiliary contact block (removable) acc. to: contacts cannot be closed at the same time.
• ZH 1/457
• EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L ZH1/457
Safety rules for control units on power-operated presses in the metalworking industry.
EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L
Low-voltage controlgear, control equipment, and switching elements.
Special requirements for positively-driven contacts
SUVA
Accident prevention regulations of the „Schweizer Unfallverhütungsanstalt“
(Swiss Institute for Accident Insurance)
Contact reliability
Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA acc. to EN 60947-5-4 Frequency of contact faults <10–8, i.e. <1 fault per 100 million operating cycles
Contact endurance for AC-15/AC-14 and DC-13 utilization categories
The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking current. It is assumed that the
operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of
the supply system.
If magnetic circuits other than the contactor coil systems or solenoid valves are present,
e.g. magnetic brakes, protective measures for the load circuits are necessary.
RC elements and freewheel diodes would be suitable as protective measures.
The characteristic curves apply to:
• LSH auxiliary contactors
• LSZDH5 and LSZD05 auxiliary contact blocks
Diagram legend:
1) Snap-on auxiliary contact blocks: Ie/DC-13 max. 6 A.

Contactor Type LSHD
Page Size 00
84 Basic units and auxiliary contact blocks
• Rated control supply voltage V AC max. 600
• Rated voltage V AC 600
• Switching capacity A 600, Q 600
• Uninterrupted current at 240 V AC A 10
General data
cycles
Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary Operating 10 million
contact block cycles
Solid-state compatible auxiliary Operating 5 million
contact block cycles
Rated insulation voltage U i (degree of pollution 3) V 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kV 6
Safe isolation between the coil and the contacts in the basic unit V 400
Permissible ambient temperature During operation °C –25 ... +60
During storage °C –55 ... +80
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse AC/DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 5/10
Sine pulse AC/DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 8/10
Screw terminals Auxiliary conductor and coil terminals Screw terminals
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) • Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (1 ... 4)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (18 ... 14) 1 x 12
• Terminal screws M3
Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductor and coil terminals Cage Clamp terminals
(weld-free protection at I k ≥1 kA)
• Fuse links, gL/gG operational class
- DIAZED A 10
- NEOZED A 10
• Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic A 6
(short-circuit current I k < 400 A)
An „insulation stop“ must be used for conductor cross-sections ≤ 1 mm².

Maximum external diameter of the conductor insulation: 3.6 mm.

Contactor Type LSHD
Size 00 Page
Control
Magnetic coil operating range 85
AC operation at 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
DC operation at +50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
at +60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Power consumption of the magnetic coils
(when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)
AC operation, 50 Hz • Closing VA/p.f. 27/0.8
• Closed VA/p.f. 4.6/0.27
AC operation, 60 Hz • Closing VA/p.f. 24/0.75
• Closed VA/p.f. 3.5/0.27
Permissible residual current of the electronics
(with 0 signal)
for AC operation < 3 mA x (230 V/Us)
for DC operation <10 mA x (24 V/Us)
Operating times1)
(Total break time = OFF-delay + Arcing time)
AC operation Values apply with coil in cold state
Closing and at operating temperature for
operating range
• ON-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 8 ... 35
1.0 x Us ms 10 ... 25
• OFF-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 6 ... 20
1.0 x Us ms 7 ... 20
Opening
• OFF-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 4 ... 30
1.0 x Us ms 5 ... 30
• ON-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 5 ... 30
1.0 x Us ms 7 ... 20
DC operation
Closing
• ON-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 25 ... 100
1.0 x Us ms 30 ... 50
• OFF-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 20 ... 90
1.0 x Us ms 25 ... 45
Opening
• OFF-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 7 ... 10
1.0 x Us ms 7 ... 9
• ON-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 13 ... 16
1.0 x Us ms 13 ... 15
Arcing time ms 10 ... 15
Dependence of the switching frequency z' on the operational current I’ and
operational voltage U’
z’ = z . Ie /I’ . (Ue /U’)1.5 . 1/h
1) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attentuated against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times;
diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).

Contactor Type LSHD
Page Size 00
Load side
86 Rated operational currents Ie
AC-12 A 10
AC-15/AC-14 up to 230 V A 6
for rated operational voltage Us 400 V A 3
500 V A 2
690 V A 1
DC-12
for rated operational voltage Us
• 1 conducting path 24 V A 10
60 V A 6
110 V A 3
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.3
600 V A 0.15
• 2 conducting paths in series 24 V A 10
60 V A 10
110 V A 4
220 V A 2
440 V A 1.3
600 V A 0.65
60 V A 10
110 V A 10
220 V A 3.6
440 V A 2.5
600 V A 1.8
DC-13
for rated operational voltage Us
• 1 conducting path 24 V A 101)
60 V A 2
110 V A 1
220 V A 0.3
440 V A 0.14
600 V A 0.1
60 V A 3.5
110 V A 1.3
220 V A 0.9
440 V A 0.2
600 V A 0.1
60 V A 4.7
110 V A 3
220 V A 1.2
440 V A 0.5
600 V A 0.26
Switching frequency z
• In operating cycles/h AC-12/DC-12 h–1 1000
during normal duty AC-15/AC-14 h–1 1000
for utilization category DC-13 h–1 1000
• No-load switching frequency h–1 10000
Dependence of the switching frequency z' on the operational current I’ and
operational voltage U’
z’ = z . Ie /I’ . (Ue /U’)1.5 . 1/h
1) Snap-on auxiliary contact blocks: 6 A.

W LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE – OVERVIEW
W DC OPERATION
IEC 60947 and EN 60947 (VDE 0660). Page
The LSH auxiliary contactors for switching auxiliary circuits are tailored to the special requirements of working with electron-
87
ic controls. The LSHD ... G/N auxiliary contactors cannot be extended with auxiliary contact blocks.
W FUNCTION
No auxiliary contact blocks can be snapped onto these auxiliary contactors. They have a low power consumption, an extended
magnetic coil operating range and an integrated surge suppressor for damping opening surges (exception: LSHD ... N).
W TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the LSH auxiliary contactors.
Contactor Type LSHD ... N LSH ... G

Size 00 00
Magnetic coil operating range 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us
Power consumption of the magnetic coil (for cold coil)
Closing = closed
At Us = 17 V W 1.2
At Us = 24 V W 2.3
At Us = 30 V W 3.6
Permissible residual current <10 mA x (24 V/Us)
of the electronics for 0 signal
Overvoltage configuration of the magnetic coil No overvoltage damping With diode integrated
Operating times
• Closing at 17 V
- ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 120
- OFF-delay NC ms 30 ... 70
• At 24 V
• At 30 V
• Closing at 17 ... 30 V
- OFF-delay NO ms 7 ... 17 40 ... 60
- ON-delay NC ms 22 ... 30 60 ... 70
Upright mounting position Please ask
W LSS CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE – OVERVIEW
W DC OPERATION
Page IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660).
88 The LSS contactors for switching motors are tailored to the special requirements of working with electronic controls.
The LSSD contactors cannot be extended with auxiliary contacts or contact blocks.
Two single-pole auxiliary contacts can be fitted to the LSS0 contactors.
W FUNCTION
LSS contactors have a low power consumption, an extended operating range of the magnetic coil and an integrated surge
suppressor for damping opening surges.
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the LSDD and LSD0 contactors for
switching motors. The LSSD contactors cannot be extended with auxiliary contacts or contact blocks. Two single-pole auxil-
iary contacts LSZ0D010/D001 can be fitted to the LSS0 contactor (see Accessories).
Contactor Type LSSD ... G LSS0 ... H

Size 00 0
General data
Mechanical endurance Operating 30 million 10 million
cycles
Control
Magnetic coil operating range 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us
Power consumption of the at Us 17 V W 1.2 2.1
magnetic coil 24 V W 2.3 4.2
(for cold coil) 30 V W 3.6 6.6
Closing = closed
Permissible residual current < 10 mA x (24 V/Us) < 6 mA x (24 V/Us)
of the electronics (for 0 signal)
Overvoltage configuration of the magnetic coil With diode With varistor
U
Operating times of the contactors for PLC-use
• Closing
- at 17 V ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 120 93 ... 270
OFF-delay NC ms 30 ... 70 83 ... 250
- at 24 V ON-delay NO ms 30 ... 60 64 ... 87
OFF-delay NC ms 20 ... 40 55 ... 78
- at 30 V ON-delay NO ms 20 ... 50 53 ... 64
OFF-delay NC ms 15 ... 30 45 ... 56
• Opening at 17... 30 V OFF-delay NO ms 40 ... 60 18 ... 19
ON-delay NC ms 60 ... 70 24 ... 25
W ACCESSORIES FOR LSD AND LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW

W SNAP-ON AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS
The auxiliary contact blocks and the maximum number of contacts that can be mounted are described in the sections Page
„Contactors“ and „Auxiliary Contactors“.
89
Operation
In the case of the versions for rated control supply voltages of 110 V and 230 V, either AC voltage or DC voltage can be applied
on the line side, whereas the variant for 24 V is designed for DC operation only. A DC-operated contactor is connected to the
output in accordance with the input voltage that is applied. The mean value of the OFF-delay is approximately 1.5 times the
specified minimum time.
W SURGE SUPPRESSION
• (also for Cage Clamp terminals on request) size 00, 0, 2, 3, 6 to 12
All LSD contactors and LSH auxiliary contactors can be retrofitted with RC elements or varistors for damping opening surges
in the coil. Diodes or diode assemblies can be used. The surge suppressors are plugged onto the front of size 00 contactors.
Space is provided for them next to a snap-on auxiliary contact block. With all size 0 to 3 contactors, varistors, RC elements and
diode assemblies can be plugged on directly at the coil terminals, either on the top or underneath. The plug-in direction of the
diodes and diode assemblies is determined by a coding device. Auxiliary contactors are supplied either without overvoltage
damping or with a varistor or diode connected as standard, according to the version.
Note: The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are
damped against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).
W SOLDER PIN ADAPTERS

The solder pin adapters for the size 00 contactors are available in version for:
• contactors with one integrated auxiliary contact
W SEALABLE COVERS FOR SIZES 00 TO 12 (ON REQUEST)

When contactors and auxiliary contactors are used in safety-oriented applications, it must be ensured that it is impossible to operate
the contactors manually. For ALEA contactors there are sealable covers available for this purpose on requets; these prevent
accidental manual operation. These are transparent molded-plastic caps with a bracket that enables the contactor to be sealed.
W MECHANICAL LATCHING BLOCK

Technical specifications according to EN 61812-1 (VDE 0435 Part 2021)
Contactor Type LSZ00113

Mechanical latching block for the LSD0 and LSD2 contactors
Rated insulation voltage U i V 690
Mechanical endurance with LSD0 3 million
(operating cycles) with LSD2 50000
Permissible ambient temperature
• During operation °C –25 ... +60
• During storage °C –50 ... +80
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20
Operating range of the magnetic coil 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
at AC 50/60 Hz and DC
Power consumption of the magnetic coils of the unlocking magnet W Approx. 4
(for cold coil and 1.0 x Us)
AC and DC operation
Command duration for de-energizing
• AC operation ms 18 ... 31
• DC operation ms 18 ... 26
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 1 x 4
AWG 2 x 14; 1 x 12
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 1 x 2.5
AWG 2 x 14; 1 x 12
Tightening torque of the terminal screws Nm 0.8 ... 1.1
lb.in 7 ... 9.5
W LSK CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW
W AC OPERATION
Page IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660)
90 The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. The LSK capacitor contactors
are special version of the size 00 to 3 ALEA contactors. The capacitors are precharged by means of the mounted leading NO
contacts and resistors; only then do the main contacts close. This prevents disturbances in the network and welding of the
contactors. Only discharged capacitors are permitted to be switched on with capacitor contactors. The auxiliary contact block
which is snapped onto the capacitor contactor contains the three leading NO contacts and in the case of 00 one standard NC
contact and in the case of 0 and 3 one standard NO contact, which is unassigned. Size 00 also contains another unassigned
NO contact in the basic unit. In addition, a 2-pole auxiliary contact block can be mounted laterally on the LSK3 capacitor
contactors (1 NO + 1 NC versions); type LSZ0D711. The fitting of auxiliary switches for LSKD and LSK0 is not expandable. For
the capacitor switching capacity of the basic LSD contactor version, see Technical specifications.
W MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS
In the area of capacitor switching contactors, difficulty inflammable and self-extinguishing materials may be used only,
because abnormal temperatures within the area of the resistance spirals cannot be excluded.
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the LSDD contactors for size 00, to those
of the LSD0 contactors for size 0 and to those of the LSD3 contactors for size 3.
Contactor Type LSKD17B3 LSK03213 LSK36213

Size 00 0 3
Capacitor rating at 230 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 3 … 7.5 3.5 … 15 3.5 … 30
rated power 400 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 5 … 12.5 6 … 25 5 … 50
(utilization category AC-6b) 525 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 7.5 … 15 7.8 … 30 7.5 … 60
690 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 10 … 21 10 … 42 10 … 84
Auxiliary contacts mounted (unassigned) 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO
Auxiliary contacts mountable (lateral), not for sizes 00 and 0 -- 2 NC + 2 NO or
1 NO + 1 NC
Magnetic coil operating range 0.8 … 1.1 x Us
Max. switching frequency h–1 180 100
Electrical endurance Operating > 250000 > 150000 > 100000
cycles
Ambient temperature °C ≤ 60
Standards IEC 60947/EN 60947 (VDE 0660)
Short-circuit protection 1.6 ... 2.2 x I e
Screw terminals Main conductors Screw terminals
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) • Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (1 ... 2.5);
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
Acc. to IEC 60947; Acc. to IEC 60947;
Max. 2 x (1 ... 4) Max. 1 x 101)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (1 ... 2.5);
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)1)
• AWG cables
- solid AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (16 ... 12)
- solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14) 2 x (14 ... 10)
- stranded AWG 1 x 12 1x8
• Terminal screws M3 M4 (Pozidriv size 2)
- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5
lb.in 7 ... 10.3 18 ... 22
Coil voltage
0.85 – 1.1 x UN 230 VAC; 50/60 Hz 230 VAC; 50 Hz 230 VAC; 50 Hz
1) BEZ00116 feeder terminal for 25 mm²

W LSK CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, 12.5 ... 50 kVAR

Contactor Type LSKD17B3 LSK03213 LSK36213
Size 00 0 3 Page
Screw terminals Main conductors: Screw terminals 91
• Solid mm² 2.5 ... 16
• Stranded mm² 4 ... 70
solid or stranded
• Solid mm² 2.5 ... 16
• Stranded mm² 10 ... 70
solid or stranded
Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² Max. 2 x 35
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² Max. 2 x 35
• Solid mm² Max. 2 x 16
• Stranded mm² Max. 2 x 50
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (10 ... 1/0)
solid or stranded
• Terminal screw M6 (hex. socket, A/F 4)
- tightening torque Nm 4 ... 6
lb.in 36 ... 53
Connection for drilled copper bars1) Max. width mm 10
Without box terminal with cable lugs2) • Finely stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 503)
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) • Stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 703)
solid or stranded
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4); 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4);
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4) 0.75) acc. to IEC 60947;
acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
max. 2 x (1 ... 4)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4);
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)4);
solid or stranded 2 x (18 ... 14)4); 1 x 12
- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
lb.in 7 ... 10.3
Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductors:
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)
solid or stranded SD
1) If bars larger than 12 x 10 mm are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance. (on request)
2) When connecting conductors which are larger than 25 mm2, the terminal cover must be used to keep the phase clearance. (on request)
3) Only with crimped cable lugs according to DIN 46234. Cable lug max. 20 mm wide.
4) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical crosssections are used, this restriction does not apply.
W AC OPERATION
Page Contactors LA3K are suitable for switching low-inductive and low loss capacitors in capacitor banks (IEC70 and 831,
92 VDE 0560) without and with reactors. Capacitor switching contactors are fitted with early make contacts and damping
resistors, to reduce the value of make current <70 x Ie.
W OPERATING CONDITIONS
Capacitor switching contactors are protected against contact welding for a prospective making current of 200 x Ie.
W MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS
In the area of capacitor switching contactors, difficulty inflammable and self-extinguishing materials may be used only,
because abnormal temperatures within the area of the resistance spirals cannot be excluded.
acc. to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660
Contactor Type LA3K1813 LA3K1823 LA3K2433 LA3K3233

Capacitor rating at 230 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 0–7 0–7 5 – 11 5 – 14
rated power 400 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 0 – 12.5 0 – 12.5 10 – 20 20 – 25
(utilization category AC-6b) 525 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 0 – 15 0 – 15 12 – 25 12 – 32
690 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 0 – 18 0 – 18 14 – 28 14 – 36
Auxiliary contacts mounted (unassigned) 1NO 1NC
Auxiliary contacts mountable snap on front 1NC/6A 1NC/6A
LA190135 LA190135
1NO/3A 1NO/3A 1NO/3A 1NO/3A
LA190100 LA190100 LA190100 LA190100
1NC/3A 1NC/3A 1NC/3A 1NC/3A
LA190101 LA190101 LA190101 LA190101
side mounted 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3A
LA190134 LA190134
Magnetic coil operating range -- -- -- --
Max. switching frequency h–1 120 120 120 120
Electrical endurance Operating 250000 250000 150000 150000
cycles
Rated operational current Ie at 50°C A 14 – 18 14 – 18 14 – 28 14 – 36
at 60°C A 14 – 18 14 – 18 14 – 28 14 – 36
Ambient temperature °C ≤ 60 (90) 1) ≤ 60 (90) 1) ≤ 60 (90) 1) ≤ 60 (90) 1)
Standards IEC 947-4-1 / EN 60947-4-1 / VDE 0660
Short-circuit protection fuse gL/gG A 35 – 63 35 – 63 50 – 80 63 – 100
For contactors without thermal overload relay
• 1 cable per clamp solid or stranded mm² 0.75 – 6 1.5 – 25
flexible mm² 1–4 2.5 – 16
flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0.75 – 4 1.5 – 16
• 2 cable per clamp solid or stranded mm² 6 + (1 – 6) / 4 + (0.75 – 4) 16 + (2.5 – 6) / 10 + (4 – 10)
2.5 + (0.75 – 2.5) / 1.5 + (0.75 – 1.5) 6 + (4 – 6) / 4 + (2.5 – 4)
flexible mm² 6 + (1.5 – 6) / 4 + (1 – 4) 16 + (2.5 – 6) / 10 + (4 – 10)
2.5 + (0.75 – 2.5) / 1.5 + (0.75 – 1.5) 6 + (4 – 6) / 4 + (2.5 – 4)
• Cables per clamp 2 2
For main connector
• 1 cable per clamp solid AWG 18 – 10 16 – 10
flexible AWG 18 – 10 14 – 4
• 2 cable per clamp solid AWG 10 + (16 – 10) / 12 + (18 – 12) 10 + (16 – 10) / 12 + (18 – 12)
14 + (18 – 16) / 16 + (18 – 16) 14 + (18 – 16) / 16 + (18 – 16)
flexible AWG 10 + (14 – 10) / 12 + (18 – 12) 4 + (18 – 12) / 6 + (18 – 8)
14 + (18 – 14) / 16 + (18 – 16) 8 + (18 – 8) / 10 + (18 – 12)
• Cables per clamp 2 2
Coil voltage
0.85 – 1.1 x UN 230 VAC; 50 Hz
Mechanical life AC operated S x 106 10 10
DC operated S x 106 10 10
Short time current 10 S current A 144 240
Power loss per pole at Ie / AC3 400V W 0.5 1.3
1) With reduced control voltage range 0,9 up to 1,0 x US and with reduced rated current Ie/AC1 accordung to Ie/AC3

acc. to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660
Contactor Type LA3K5044 LA3K6233 LA3K7433 LA3K9033 LA3K1133 Page

Capacitor rating at 230 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 12 – 20 12 – 28 12 – 30 22 – 40 20 – 50
rated power 400 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 20 – 33.3 20 – 50 20 – 60 33 – 75 33 – 80 93
(utilization category AC-6b) 525 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 26 – 43 26 – 64 26 – 75 45 – 95 45 – 115
690 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 30 – 48 30 – 72 30 – 87 50 – 108 50 – 130
Auxiliary contacts mounted (unassigned) -- -- -- -- --
Auxiliary contacts mountable snap on front 1NC/6A
LA190135
1NO/3A 1NO/3A 1NO/3A 1NO/3A 1NO/3A
LA190100 LA190100 LA190100 LA190100 LA190100
1NC/3A 1NC/3A 1NC/3A 1NC/3A 1NC/3A
LA190101 LA190101 LA190101 LA190101 LA190101
side mounted 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3A
LA190134 LA190134 LA190134 LA190134 LA190134
Magnetic coil operating range -- -- -- -- --
Max. switching frequency h–1 120 120 80 80 80
Electrical endurance Operating 150000 150000 120000 120000 120000
cycles
Rated operational current Ie at 50°C A 30 – 48 30 – 72 30 – 108 50 – 115 50 – 144
at 60°C A 30 – 48 30 – 72 30 – 78 50 – 108 50 – 130
Ambient temperature °C ≤ 60 (90) 1) ≤ 60 (90) 1) ≤ 60 (90) 1) ≤ 60 (90) 1)
Standards IEC 947-4-1 / EN 60947-4-1 / VDE 0660
Short-circuit protection fuse gL/gG A 80 – 160 125 – 160 160 – 200 160 – 200 160 – 250
For contactors without thermal overload relay
• 1 cable per clamp solid or stranded mm² 4 – 50
flexible mm² 10 – 35
flexible with multicore cable end mm² 6 – 35
• 2 cable per clamp top below
solid or stranded mm² 50 + 4 / 35 + 6 / 25 + (6 – 16) 0.5 – 95 10 – 120
16 + (6 – 16) / 10 + (6 – 16)
flexible mm² 50 + (4 – 10) / 35 + (4 – 16) 0.5 – 70 10 – 95
25 + (4 – 25) / 16 + (4 – 16)
• Cables per clamp 2 1+1
For main connector
• 1 cable per clamp solid AWG 12 – 10
flexible AWG 10 – 0
• 2 cable per clamp top below
solid AWG 10 + (12 – 10) / 12 + 12 18 – 10 --
flexible AWG 1 + (12 – 10) / 2 + (8 – 12) 18 – 3 / 0 8–4/0
3 + (12 – 8) / 4 + (10 – 6)
• Cables per clamp 2 1+1
Coil voltage
0.85 – 1.1 x UN 230 VAC; 50 Hz
Mechanical life AC operated S x 106 10 10 10 10 5
DC operated S x 106 10 10 10 10 5
Short time current 10 S current A 360 504 592 680 880
Power loss per pole at Ie / AC3 400V W 2.2 3.9 5.5 4.3 6.0
1) With reduced control voltage range 0,9 up to 1,0 x US and with reduced rated current Ie/AC1 accordung to Ie/AC3

aacc. to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660
Page Mounted auxiliary contacts Type LA3K18 LA3K24,..32,..40 LA3K50,..62,..74 LA3K90,..115

Rated insulation voltage Ui 1) V~ 690 -- -- --
94 Thermal rated current Ith to 690V
Ambient temperature 40°C A 16 -- -- --
60°C A 12 -- -- --
Utilization category AC15
Rated operational current Ie 220-240V A 12 -- -- --
380-415V A 4 -- -- --
440V A 4 -- -- --
500V A 3 -- -- --
660-690V A 1 -- -- --
Utilization category DC13
Rated operational current Ie 60V A 8 -- -- --
110V A 1 -- -- --
220V A 0.1 -- -- --
Short circuit protection
short-circuit current 1kA, contact welding not accepted
max. fuse size gL (gG) A 25 -- -- --
Control Circuit
Power consumption of coils
AC operated inrush VA 33-45 90-115 140-165 190-280
sealed VA 7-10 9-13 13-18 2,5-5
W 2.6-3 2.7-4 5.4-7 2.5-5
DC operated inrush W 75 140 200 190-280
sealed W 2 2 6 2,5-5
Operation range of coils
in multiples of control voltage Us AC operated 0.85-1.1 0.85-1.1 0.85-1.1 0.85-1.1
DC operated 0.8-1.1 0.8-1.1 0.8-1.1 0.8-1.1
Switching time
At control voltage Us ±10% 2) 3)
AC operated make time ms 8-16 10-25 12-28 20-35
release time ms 5-13 8-15 8-15 35-50
arc duration ms 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-15
DC operated make time ms 8-12 10-20 12-23 20-35
release time ms 8-13 10-15 10-18 35-50
arc duration ms 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-15
Cable cross-section
Auxiliary connector solid mm² 0.75-6 -- -- --
flexible mm² 1-4 -- -- --
flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0.75-4 -- -- --
Magnet coil solid mm² 0.75-2.5 0.75-2.5 0.75-2.5 0.75-2.5
flexible mm² 0.5-2.5 0.5-2.5 0.5-2.5 0.5-2.5
flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0.5-1.5 0.5-1.5 0.5-1.5 0.5-1.5
Clamps per pole 2 2 2 2
Auxiliary connector solid AWG 18-10 -- -- --
flexible AWG 18-10 -- -- --
Magnet coil solid AWG 14-12 14-12 14-12 14-12
flexible AWG 18-12 18-12 18-12 18-12
Clamps per pole 2 2 2 2
Auxiliary contacts snap on or side mounted Type LA190135 LA190034 LA190100 LA190101
1 NC 1 NO+1 NC 1 NO 1 NC
AC15 230V A 6 3 3 3
AC15 400V A 4 2 2 2
AC1 690V A 25 10 2 2
1) Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request
2) Total breaking time = release time + arc duration
3) Values for delay of the release time of the make contact and the make time of the break contact will be increased, if magnet coils are protected against voltage peaks (varistor, RC-unit,
diode-unit)
W LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES – OVERVIEW

The LSW reversing contactor assemblies can be ordered as follows:
Sizes 00 to 3 Page
• Fully wired and tested, with mechanical and electrical interlock. For assemblies with AC operation and 50/60 Hz, a dead 95
interval of 50 ms must be provided when used with voltages ≥ 500 V; a dead interval of 30 ms is recommend for use
with voltages ≥ 400 V. These dead times do not apply to assemblies with DC operation.
Sizes 00 to 12
For overload relays for motor protection, see “Protection Equipment: Thermal overload relays”. The LSW contactor
assemblies have screw terminals and are suitable for screwing or snapping onto 35 mm standard mounting rails.
W COMPLETE UNITS UP TO SIZE 3

The fully wired reversing contactor assemblies are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to
EN 50274. The contactor assemblies consist of 2 contactors with the same power, with one NC contact in the basic unit.
The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked (NC contact interlock). For motor protection, LST thermal
overload relays for direct mounting or stand-alone installation must be ordered separately.
Rated data AC-2 and AC-3 at AC Included in complete unit

50 Hz 400 V Size Order No.
Rating Operational Contactor Mechanical Wiring set AC230V/50/60 HZ
current Ie interlock2) Fully wired and tested
kW A contactor assemblies
3 7 00 LSDD07 -- LSZDW0015) LSWD0733
4 9 LSDD09 LSWD0933
5.5 12 LSDD12 LSWD1233
5.5 12 0 LSD012 LSZ0W002 LSZ0W0016) LSW01233
7.5 17 LSD017 LSW01733
11 25 LSD025 LSW02533
15 32 2 LSD232 LSZ0W002 LSZ2W0017) LSW23233
18.5 40 LSD240 LSW24033
22 50 LSD250 LSW25033
30 65 3 LSD365 LSZ0W002 LSZ3W0017) LSW36533
37 80 LSD380 LSW38033
45 95 LSD395 LSW39533
2) Laterally mountable with two auxiliary contacts, one for each contactor.
5) Wiring set contains: mechanical interlock; connecting clips for 2 contactors; wiring modules on the top and bottom.
6) Wiring set contains: wiring modules on the top and bottom.
7) Wiring set contains: 2 connecting clips for contactors; wiring modules on the top and bottom.
W COMPONENTS FOR CUSTOMER ASSEMBLY

For customer assembly of reversing contactor assemblies size 6, 10 and 12, following components are available.
Contactors, thermal overload relays, the mechanical interlock (as of size 0) and – for momentary-contact operation –
auxiliary contact blocks for latching must be ordered separately.

Wiring set for size 6 LSZ6W002
Wiring set for size 10 LSZEW001
Wiring set for size 12 LSZ6W001
Mechanical interlock for size 6, 10, 12 LSZ6W001
W LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES – FUNCTION

The operating times of the individual LSD contactors are rated in such a way that no overlapping of the contact making
Page and the arcing time between two contactors can occur on reversing, providing they are interlocked by way of their
auxiliary switches (NC contact interlock) and the mechanical interlock. For assemblies with AC operation and 50/60 Hz, a
96 dead interval of 50 ms must be provided when used with voltages ≥ 500 V. This dead times does not apply to assemblies
with DC operation. The operating times of the individual contactors are not affected by the mechanical interlock.
The following points should be noted:
Size 00
• For maintained-contact operation:
Use contactors with an NC contact in the basic unit for the electrical interlock.
• For momentary-contact operation:
Use contactors with an NC contact in the basic unit for the electrical interlock; in addition, an auxiliary contact block with
at least one NO contact for latching is required per contactor.
Sizes 0 to 3
• For maintained-contact operation:
The contactors have no auxiliary contact in the basic unit; NC contacts for the electrical interlock are therefore integrated
in the mechanical interlock that can be mounted on the side of contactor (one contact each for the left and right-hand
contactors).
• For momentary-contact operation:
Electrical interlock as for maintained-contact operation; for the purpose of latching an auxiliary contact with an NO
contact is additionally required for each contactor. This contact can be snapped onto the top of the contactors.
Alternatively, auxiliary contact blocks mounted on the side can be used; they must be fitted onto the outside of each
contactor.
W SURGE SUPPRESSION
Sizes 00 to 3
All contactor assemblies can be fitted with RC elements or varistors for damping opening surges in the coil.
As with the individual contactors, the surge suppressors can either be plugged onto the top of the contactors (size 00) or
fitted onto the coil terminals on the top or bottom (size 0 to 3).
The technical specifications are identical to those of the LSD .. contactors.
The CSA and UL approvals only apply to the complete contactor assemblies and not to the individual parts for customer
assembly.
W WYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES – OVERVIEW

These LSY contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting are designed for standard applications.
Page
Note:
97
Contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting in special applications such as very heavy starting or wye-delta starting of
special motors must be customized. Help with designing such special applications is available.
W COMPLETE UNITS UP TO SIZE 3

The LSY contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting can be ordered as follows:
Sizes 00 to 3:
• Fully wired and tested, with electrical interlock, dead interval of up to 10 s on reversing (size 00 with electrical and
mechanical interlocks)
A dead interval of 50 ms on reversing is already integrated in the time relay function. There is also a range of accessories
(auxiliary contact blocks, surge suppressors, etc.) that must be ordered separately.
For overload relays for motor protection, see "Thermal Overload Relays”
The LSY contactor assemblies have screw terminals and are suitable for screwing or snapping onto 35 mm standard mounting
rails. Fully wired and tested LSY contactor assemblies have one unassigned NO contact which is mounted onto the front of the
K3 delta contactor. A timing relay is mounted onto the right side of sizes 00, 0 to 2 (7,5 kW, 11 kW and 22 kW).
Rated data Size

at AC 50 HZ 400 V
Rating Operational Motor Line/delta Star contactor WYE-Delta timer Order No.
current Ie current contactor complete
kW A A 230 V 50/60 Hz
up to 7.5 17 17 00-00-00 LSDD1213 LSDD0713 LSZD0101 LSYD1733
up to 15 32 34 0-0-0 LSD02533 LSD01213 LSZD0101 LSY03233
up to 22 50 43 2-2-0 LSD23233 LSD02533 LSZD0101 LSY25033
W COMPONENTS FOR CUSTOMER ASSEMBLY

Installation kits with wiring modules and, if necessary, mechanical connectors are available for contactor assemblies for
wyedelta starting. Contactors, overload relays, wye-delta timers, auxiliary contacts for electrical interlock – if required also
feeder terminals, mechanical interlocks (exception: In the case of the wiring set for size 00 contactor assemblies the
mechanical interlock between the delta contactor and the star contactor is included in the kit) and base plates – must be
ordered separately.
The wiring sets for sizes 00 and 0 contain the top and bottom main conducting path connections between the line and delta
contactors (top) and between the delta and star contactors (bottom). In the case of sizes 2 to 12 only the bottom main con-
ducting path connection between the delta and star contactors is included in the wiring module, owing to the
larger conductor cross-section at the infeed.

Wiring set for single infeed size 00 1) LSZDY001
Wiring set for single infeed size 0 2) LSZ0Y001
Wiring set for single infeed size 2 LSZ2Y004
Star jumper for size 00 LSZDY002
Star jumper for size 0 LSZ0Y002
Star jumper for size 2 LSZ2Y005
Base plate for size 2/2/0 LSZ2Y001
Y-D timer - 20s LSZD0101
Y-D timer - 60s LSZD0102
1) Wiring set contains: mechanical interlock, 3 connecting clips; wiring modules on the top (connection between line and delta contactor) and on the bottom (connection between delta and wye-
contactor); star jumper.
2) Wiring set contains: 5 connecting clips; wiring modules on the top (connection between line and delta contactor) and on the bottom (connection between delta and wye-contactor); star jumper.
W WYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES – OVERVIEW
W MOTOR PROTECTION
Page Thermal overload relays can be used for overload protection. The overload relay can be either mounted onto the line
98 contactor or separately fitted. It must be set to 0.58 times the rated motor current.
W FUNCTION
Wye-delta starting can only be used either if the motor normally operates in a Δ connection or starts softly or if the load
torque during Y starting is low and does not increase sharply. On the Y step the motors can carry approximately 50 % (class
KL 16) or 30 % (class KL 10) of their rated torque; The tightening torque is approximately 1/3 of that during direct on-line
starting. The starting current is approximately 2 to 2.7 times the rated motor current.
The changeover from Y to Δ must not be effected until the motor has run up to rated speed. Operating mechanisms which
require this changeover to be performed earlier are unsuitable for wyedelta starting.
The ratings given in the table are only applicable to motors with a starting current ratio IA ≤ 8.4 x IN and using wye-delta
timing relay with a dead interval on reversing of approximately 50 ms.
W SURGE SUPPRESSION
Sizes 00 to 3:
All contactor assemblies can be fitted with RC elements, varistors or diode assemblies for damping opening surges in the
coil. As with the individual contactors, the surge suppressors can either be plugged onto the top of the contactors (size 00)
or fitted onto the coil terminals on the top or bottom (size 0 to 3).
Sizes 6 to 12:
The contactors are fitted with varistors as standard.
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders with short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V.
For Thermal overload relays see Protection Equipment: Thermal Overload Relays.
Rating Sizes Rated motor Thermal Setting range Permissible back-up fuses for starters,
of contactors current overload relay comprising contactor assemblies and overload relays.
K1-K3-K2
(the thermal overload Single or double infeed1)

relays must be set to Fuse links
0.58 times the rated LV HRC LV HRC British
motor current)
DIAZED Operational class listed Standard
NEOZED aM fuses Fuses
gL/gG operational class CLASS BS88
RK5/L
Type of coordination Type of Type of
coordination coordination
"1" "2" "2" "1" "2"
kW A Type A A A A A A A
5.5 00-00-00 12 LSTD0800 5.5 ... 8 35 20 10 30 35 20
7.5 00-00-00 16 LSTD1000 7 ... 10 35 20 16 40 35 20
11 0-0-0 22 LST01600 11 ... 16 63 25 20 60 63 25
15 0-0-0 29 LST02000 14 ... 20 100 35 20 80 100 35
18.5 0-0-0 35 LST02500 20 ... 25 100 35 20 100 100 35
22 2-2-0 41 LST23200 22 ... 32 125 63 35 125 125 63
1) The maximum rated motor current must not be exceeded.

W LSY COMPLETE UNITS, 3 ... 22 kW

Starter Type LSY.. .. LSYD LSY0 LSY2
Sizes 00-00-00 0-0-0 2-2-0 Page
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the individual LSD contactors and LST thermal overload relays
Utilization category DC-1 Operat- 3 million 99
ing
cycles
Short-circuit protection without overload relay 1)
Maximum rated current of the fuse

Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/g
GLV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED
Single or double infeed
- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination „1“ A 35 100 125
EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination „2“ A 20 35 63
Control circuit
Fuse links, gL/g A 10
GDIAZED, NEOZED A 62), if the auxiliary contact of the Thermal overload relay is connected
in the contactor coil circuit
(short-circuit current Ik ≤1 kA)
Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic A 10
A 62), if the auxiliary contact of the Thermal overload relay is connected
in the contactor coil circuit
Size of individual contactors K1 line contactor Type LSD ...D12 ...025 ...232
K3 delta contactor Type LSD ...D12 ...025 ...232
K2 star contactor Type LSD ...D07 ...012 ...025
Unassigned auxiliary contacts of the individual contactors 3)
Current-carrying capacity with reversing time up to 10 s

Rated operational current Ie at 400 V A 17 40 65
500 V A 11.3 31.2 55.4
690 V A 9 22.5 53.7
Rated power for induction motors at at 230 V kW 4.7 12 20.4
50 Hz and 60 Hz and 400 V kW 8.2 21 35
500 V kW 6.9 20.5 38
690 V kW 7.5 20.4 51
1000 V kW -- -- --
Switching frequency with overload relay h-1 15 15 15
500 V A 11.3 31 44
690 V A 9 22.5 44
Rated power for induction motors at at 230 V kW 4.7 9.4 13.8
50 Hz and 60 Hz and 400 V kW 8.2 16.3 24
500 V kW 6.9 20.4 30
690 V kW 7.5 20.4 42
1000 V kW -- -- --
Switching frequency with overload relay h-1 15 15 15
500 V A 11.3 28 39
690 V A 9 22.5 39
Rated power for induction motors at at 230 V kW 4.7 8.5 12.2
50 Hz and 60 Hz and 400 V kW 8.2 14.7 21.3
500 V kW 6.9 18.4 26.7
690 V kW 7.5 20.4 37
1000 V kW -- -- --
Switching frequency with Thermal overload relay h-1 15 15 15
1) Short-circuit protection with overload relays, see Thermal Overload Relays.

2) Up to Ik < 0.5 kA; ≤ 260 V.
DIMENSIONS
W LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE
W LSDD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00

Page Screw terminals with surge suppressor, auxiliary contact block and mounted thermal overload relay.
100 Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm.
106
99
45 95
5,3 8,6 5 67
5
5)
50
57,5
4)
51
118
3) 2) 35
2)
Auxiliary contact block
3)
Surge suppressor
4)
Drilling pattern
5)
Auxiliary contact block 1-pole
15,5 67 5
W LSSD CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00

With surge suppressor.
Deviating dimensions for auxiliary contactors with Cage Clamp terminals (on request): Height: 60 mm.
3)
5
57,5
50
4)
3)
Surge suppressor
5,3 8,6 5 67 35
45 99
4)
Drilling pattern
W LSD0 CONTACTORS AND LSSO CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 0

Screw terminals with surge suppressor, auxiliary contact block and mounted thermal overload relay.
Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm.
10 135
1) 10 45 b) 86
5 3)
35
a
4)
85
80
60
2)
143
63
For size 0:
a = 3 mm at < 240 V
a = 7 mm at > 240 V
b = DC 10 mm deeper than AC
1)
Auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable
2)
Auxiliary contact block, mountable on the front,
1- and 4-pole
3)
Surge suppressor
4)
Drilling pattern
15,5 86 5
DIMENSIONS
W LSD2 CONTACTORS, SIZE 2

15 159 Page
55 10 110
a
) 5 3)
45
1) 101
5
4)
112
80
95
2)
171
75
For size S2:

a = 0For mmsizewith
2: varis
a = 3.5
a = mm 0 mmwith
with va
varistor < 240 V, diode assembly
a = 17 mm with RC
a = 3.5 mm with varistor > 240 V
b = DC 15 mm dee
1) a = 17 mm with RC element
Auxiliary switch b
2) b = DC 15
Auxiliary mm deeper
switch b than AC
20,5 (1-,1) Auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable
2- and 4-pole
107 5 3) Surge
2)
suppresso
4)
Drilling
1- andpattern
4-pole
3)
Surge suppressor
4)
Drilling pattern

13 183
70 10 10 134
3)
a
S) 5
60
1)
5
4)
130
146
80
2)
221
5)
100
6)
For size S3:

For size 3:
a = 0 mm with varistor, diode assembl
a = 0 mmand with<varistor,
240 Vdiode assembly and < 240 V
a =a3.5=mm 3.5with
mmvaristor and > 240
with varistor andV > 240 V
a =a17=mm 17with
mmRCwithelement
RC element
b =bDC=13 DC mm13deeper than AC than AC
mm deeper
1)
1) Auxiliary
Auxiliary contactswitch block, mountable
block, laterally laterally moun
2) Auxiliary
2)
Auxiliary contactswitch block, mountable
block, mountable on the front on
front (1-, 2- and 4-pole), same dimen
(1- and 4-pole), same dimensions
for versions with screw or Cage for versionsClam
with
28 7 132 5 screwminals
or Cage Clamp terminals
3) 3) suppressor
Surge
4)
Drilling pattern
5)
For mounting on TH 35 standard mounting rail according
to EN 60715 (15 mm deep) or TH 75 standard mounting
rail according to EN 60715
6)
Allen screw 4 mm
DIMENSIONS

With lateral and front mounted auxiliary contact block box terminals.
Distance from grounded parts: Lateral: 10 mm, Front: 20 mm
Page
102
k
k
3) 37 107
17 61 5)
17
100
1)
2)
Æ7
Æ9
172
Drilling pattern
164
140
130
5) For size
k = 120
For size 6: withd
1) 2nd a
k = 120 mm (minimum clearance for removing the withdrawable coil)
2)
1)
Auxili block, lateral
2nd auxiliary contact
3)
120 2)
Auxiliary contactRC el mountable on the front
block,
140 170 4) 3RB2
3)
RC element
140 180 5)
150 217
5)
Box terminals 3RT19
(Allen
6)
3RT19
W LSDE CONTACTORS, SIZE 10

With lateral and front mounted auxiliary contact block box terminals.
k
k
3) 48 132
70 5)
17
25 120
1) Æ9
11 2)
210
180
200
168
Drilling pattern
For size 10:

k = 150 mm (minimum clearance for removing the withdrawable coil)
1)
2nd auxiliary contact block, lateral
2)
Auxiliary contact block, mountable on the front
3)
RC element
5)
Box terminals
145 138
165 202
165 217
175 251
DIMENSIONS
W LSDG CONTACTORS, SIZE 12

With lateral and front mounted auxiliary contact block.
Page
103
k
k
3) 48 150
89
25
17
130
1)
9
11
2)
214
200
182
180
Drilling pattern
For sizes S10 and S12

k = 150 mm (minimum
For size 12:
withdrawable coil)
1) mm
k = 150 2nd(minimum
auxiliaryclearance
switch for
b removing the withdrawable coil)
156 2)
160 1)
2nd auxiliary contact
Auxiliary block,block
switch lateral
180 225 2) 3)
RC
Auxiliary element
contact block, mountable on the front
180 236 4) 3RB20 overload relay
190 271
3)
RC element
5)
Box terminal block (A
6)
PLC connection 24 V
W LSDH6 AND LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3-POLE
W LSDH6 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14
230 237
Detail
70 100
M10 30 28 A = Contact erosion indication for vacuum interrupter contacts
A
Ø12
210
232
276
245
300
M3,5
A
150 1)
178
W LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14
230 237
70 100
Detail
M12 40 28 A = Contact erosion indication for vacuum interrupter contacts
2,5
9,2 12
232
295
210
240
259
255
320
M3,5
A
1)
70 1) 1)
150 220
1)
1)
With box terminals for laminated copper bars (on request).
Terminal cover for touch protection see page 32 LSZHD001.
DIMENSIONS
W LSR CONTACTORS, 4-POLE
W LSRD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00

Page Screw terminals with surge suppressor and auxiliary contact block. Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm.
104 For size 00:
Deviating dimensions for contactors
with Cage Clamp terminals:
Height: 60 mm
Mounting depth with auxiliary contact block: 110 mm
2)
3)
Surge suppressor
4)
Drilling pattern
5)
Auxiliary contact block 1-pole
W LSR0 CONTACTORS, SIZE 0

Screw terminals with surge suppressor and auxiliary contact block. Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm.
For size 0:
a = 3 mm at < 250 V
and mounting of surge suppressor
a = 7 mm at > 250 V
and mounting of surge suppressor
b = DC 10 mm deeper than AC
1)
Auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable (left)
2)
Auxiliary contact block, mountable on the front
3)
Surge suppressor
4)
Drilling pattern

For sizes 2 and 3:
a = 0 mm with varistor < 240 V
a = 3.5 mm with varistor > 240 V
a = 17 mm with RC element and diode assembly
b = Size 2: DC 15 mm deeper than AC
Size 3: DC 13 mm deeper than AC
1)
Auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable
(right or left)
2)
(1- and 4-pole)
3)
Surge suppressor
4)
Drilling pattern
5)
For mounting on TH 35 standard mounting rail
according to EN 60715 (15 mm deep) or for size 3
also to TH 75 standard mounting rail according to
EN 60715
6)
Allen screw 4 mm

DIMENSIONS
W LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00

Screw terminals for surge suppressor and auxiliary contact block. Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm. Page
105
1)
2)
Surge suppressor
3)
Drilling pattern
W LSHD...N, LSHD...G AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00

Screw terminals with diode built-in or additional surge suppressor. Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm.
All types: no further auxiliary contacts or contact blocks can be snapped on.
LSHD...N: surge suppressor can be inserted
LSHD...G: with built-in diode
Deviating dimensions for auxiliary contactors

with Cage Clamp terminals:
Height: 60 mm
1)
Surge suppressor
2)
Drilling pattern
DIMENSIONS
W LSK CAPACITOR CONTACTORS
W LSKD CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 00

Page
106
5
101
50
3
5
1
5 35
51
5
105
W LSK0 CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0

1 2 1
6 6
4 4
3 5
Drilling
1 0 0
7 2
6 0
8 5
4 8
6 0
1 8
pattern
ø 5
5
4 5 1 3 0
W LSK3 CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 3
170
116
22,5 22,5 90
51
60
150
167
130
104
124
130
Drilling
18
38
pattern
70 5
7
8
183
DIMENSIONS
W LA3K CAPACITY SWITCHING CONTACTORS
W LA3K18..
Page
107
W LA3K24.., LA3K32..
W LA3K50.., LA3K62.., LA3K74..

LA3K74..
W LA3K90.., LA3K11..
DIMENSIONS
W ACCESSORIES FOR LSD CONTACTORS
W LSZDD003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 00 W LSZDD004 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 00

Page 3-pole, with terminal 4-pole, with terminal
108
76
76
33
33
11 11 5 29 32
24 5 29 32 33
W LSZ0D003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 0 W LSZ2D003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 0

3-pole, with terminal 3-pole, with terminal
96
140
18
14 23
60
32 67
45 84
44
25
24 6 17
47 46 57
55
W LSZ00113 MECHANICAL LATCHING BLOCK

48
22,5 84 7
W LSZ2D002 TERMINAL COVER W LSZ3D002 TERMINAL COVER

FOR BOX TERMINALS, SIZE 2 FOR BOX TERMINALS, SIZE 3
123
85
160
124
55 66
94
106
70 69
108
124
DIMENSIONS
W LSZDD2.., LSZDH5..* W LSZD0501, LSZD0510

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZE 00 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZE 00
according to EN 50012 and *EN 50005 according to EN 50005
Screw terminals, 1- to 4-pole Screw terminals, cable entry from below, 1-pole Page
5 9 25 24 27
109
24 27
,72
27,5
16
38
5
13,6
13,6
36 38
W LSZ0D1.., LSZ0D1..F* W LSZ0D0.., LSZ0D9..

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZES 0 TO 12 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZES 0 TO 12
according to EN 50012 and *EN 50005 according to EN 50012 and EN 50005
Screw terminals, 4-pole Screw terminals, 1-pole
5 11
38
18
38
18
44 49 11 44
W LSZ0D711, LSZ3D811*
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZES 0 (*3) TO 12
according to EN 50012, laterally mountable,
Screw terminals, 2-pole
80
10 71
W ACCESSORIES FOR LSD CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
W LSZ6W001 MECHANICAL INTERLOCK, SIZES 6 TO 12

10
DIMENSIONS
W LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
W LSWD, SIZE 00
Page with or without LSZDW002 mechanical interlock link
110
5
67
50
5 8,6 35 7,5
90 5 51
67
W LSW0, SIZE 0
with LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock
5
60
86
8 14 10 28 7,5
40 5 39
100 61
86
DC 95
W LSW2, SIZE 2
5
120
95
10
13
10 17,5 50 8
120 5 36
52
110
DC 125
W LSW3, SIZE 3
5
157
130
12
10
12 22 65 8
150 5 46
85
134
DC147
DIMENSIONS
W LSY CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES FOR WYE-DELTA STARTING
W LSYD, SIZES 00 – 00 – 00
Page
25
111
K4
K1
88
K3 K2
K4
38
5 67
135 1105
(AC (AC+DC)
W LSY0, SIZES 0 – 0 – 0
88
K1 K3 K2
K4
158 5 130 (AC)

140 (DC)
W LSY2, SIZES 2 – 2 – 0
140
125
K2
K1 K3 K4
7 10
150 169 (AC)
178 184 (DC)
SCHEMATICS
W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR LS CONTACTORS AND ACCESSORIES
W LSDD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00

Page Terminal designations according to EN 50012
112
LSDD, LSSD contactors LSDD, LSSD contactors
1NO included 1NC included
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 A 1 (+ ) 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 2 1
A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 2 2
W LSD0, LSD2, LSD3, LSD6, LSDE AND LSDG CONTACTORS, SIZES 0 TO 12

Terminal designations according to EN 50012
LSD0, LSS0, LSD2, LSD3 LSD6, LSDE, LSDG LSD6, LSDE, LSDG contactors 2NO + 2NC
contactors contactors with front mounted 4-pole LSZ0D122 auxiliary contact block
or with lateral 2-pole LSZ0D711 auxiliary contact block
W LSDH6 AND LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14

4 NO + 4 NC
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3
A 1
A 2
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4
W LSRD CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZE 00

4NO
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 7 /L 4 LSZD.... auxiliary contact blocks
A 1 (+ ) according to EN 50005 can be
A 2 ( )
snapped on
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 8 /T 4
W LSR0, LSR2, LSR3 CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZES 0 TO 3

4NO
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 7 /L 4 LSZ0.... auxiliary contact blocks
A 1 (+ ) according to EN 50005 can be
A 2 ( )
snapped on
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 8 /T 4
LSKD contactor LSK0, LSK3 contactor

Size 00 Sizes 0, 3
SCHEMATICS
W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00

Terminal designations according to EN 500111) Page
113
LSHD067. LSHD068. LSHD069.
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 1)
Positively-driven operation is
assured likewise for auxiliary
contact blocks according to EN
50005 in conjunction with LSH
auxiliary contactors.
W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00

Terminal designations according to EN 50011 (no auxiliary contacts can be snapped on), surge suppressor can be pluged in
LSHD067N LSHD068N LSHD069N

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00

Terminal designations according to EN 50011 (no auxiliary contacts can be snapped on), diode integrated
LSHD067G LSHD068G LSHD069G

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
W ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD WITH 1 NO INCLUDED, SIZE 00

LSZD auxiliary contact blocks 1 to 4-pole, for snapping onto the front, terminal designations according to EN 50012
LSZDD201 LSZDD212 LSZDD213 LSZDD222
W ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD WITH 1 NC INCLUDED
AND FOR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00
LSZD auxiliary contact blocks, 1-pole LSZD auxiliary contact blocks, 4-pole
for snapping onto the front, cable entry from below for snapping onto the front
LSZD0510 LSZD0501 LSZDH540 LSZDH531 LSZDH522

1NO 1NC 4NO 3NO + 1NC 2NO + 2NC
SCHEMATICS
W ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0 TO 12

114 LSZ0D0 auxiliary contact blocks, 1-pole LSZ0D9.. auxiliary contact blocks, 1-pole
for snapping onto the front early make and delayed, for snapping onto the front
LSZ0D010 LSZ0D001 LSZ0D910 LSZ0D901

1NO 1NC 1NO 1NC
early make delayed
W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12

Terminal designations according to EN 50012, for snapping onto the front
LSZ0D131 LSZ0D122 LSZ0D113

3NO + 1NC 2NO + 2NC 1NO + 3NC
1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 1
1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 2
W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12

Terminal designations according to EN 50005, for snapping onto the front
LSZ0D140F LSZ0D131F LSZ0D122F LSZ0D104F

4NO 3NO + 1NC 2NO + 2NC 4NC
W FIRST LATERALLY MOUNTABLE AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, 2-POLE, FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12
LSZ0D711 LSZ0D711
1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC
mounted left mounted right
2 1 1 3 3 1 4 3
2 2 1 4 3 2 4 4
W SECOND LATERALLY MOUNTABLE AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, 2-POLE,

ONLY FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 3 TO 12
LSZ3D811 LSZ3D811
1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC
mounted left mounted right
6 1 5 3 7 1 8 3
6 2 5 4 7 2 8 4
W SURGE SUPPRESSORS FOR SIZES 00 TO 12 (CODED PLUG-IN DIRECTION)

Diode Diode assembly Varistor RC element
U
SCHEMATICS
W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LS CONTACTORS AND ACCESSORIES
W LSDD, LSSD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00

Terminal designations according to EN 50012 Page
115
1NO included 1NC included
1 3 5 13 A1 ! # )
2 4 6 14 A2 " $ )
W LSD0, LSS0, LSD2, LSD3 CONTACTORS, SIZE 0 TO 12

A1 A2
1 3 5
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
2 4 6
A1 A2
W LSD6, LSDE, LSDG CONTACTORS, SIZES 6 TO 12

Terminal designations according to EN 50012, with laterally included auxiliary contact block LSZ0D711 (2 NO + 2 NC).
Can be extended by LSZ3D811 to 4 NO + 4 NC.
2NO + 2 NC or 4 NO + 4 NC
A1 A2
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
61 21 31 71
53 13 43 83
54 14 44 84
62 22 32 72
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
W LSDH6 AND LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14

4 NO + 4 NC
SCHEMATICS
W LSRD CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZE 00

116 4 NO
1 3 5 7 A1
2 4 6 8 A2
W LSR0, LSR2, LSR3 CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZES 0 TO 3

4 NO
) )
! # %
" $ &
) )
W LSK CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS, SIZES 00 TO 3
LSKD contactor LSK0, LSK3 contactor

Size 00 Sizes 0, 3
! # ! ) A2
A1
1 3 5
#
43
#
44
" $ " )
2 4 6
A1 A2
W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00

LSHD067. LSHD068. LSHD069.

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
13 23 33 43 A1 13 21 33 43 A1 13 21 31 43 A1
14 24 34 44 A2 14 22 34 44 A2 14 22 32 44 A2
SCHEMATICS
W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD

WITH 1 NO CONTACT
W LSZDD2.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 1 TO 4-POLE, SIZE 00 Page
for snapping onto the front, terminal designations according to EN 50012 117
LSZDD201 LSZDD212 LSZDD213 LSZDD222
1NC 1NO + 2NC 1NO + 3NC 2NO + 2NC
21 21 31 43 21 31 41 53 21 31 41 53
22 22 32 44 22 32 42 54 22 32 42 54
W LSZDH5.., LSZD05.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD

WITH 1 NC CONTACT OR LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
W LSZDH5.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, SIZE 00
for snapping onto the front, terminal designations according to EN 50005
LSZDH540 LSZDH531 LSZDH522

4 NO 3NO + 1NC 2NO + 2NC
53 63 73 83 53 61 73 83 53 61 71 83
54 64 74 84 54 62 74 84 54 62 72 84
W LSZD05.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 1-POLE, SIZE 00

for snapping onto the front, cable entry from below, terminal designations according to EN 50005
LSZD0510 LSZD0501
1 NO 1NC
# ! # " # #
W LSZ0D1.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, SIZE 0 TO 12

LSZ0D122 LSZ0D131 LSZ0D113

2NO + 2NC 3NO + 1NC 1NO + 3NC
13
13 21
21 31
31 43
41 13
13 21
21 31
33 43
43 13
13 21
21 31
31 43
41
14
14 22
22 32
32 44
44 14
14 22
22 32
34 44
44 14
14 22
22 32
32 44
42
W LSZ0D1.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, SIZE 0 TO 12

LSZ0D140F LSZ0D131F LSZ0D122F LSZ0D104F

4 NO 3NO + 1NC 2NO + 2NC 4NC
13
13 21
23 31
33 43
43 13
13 21
23 31
33 43
41 13
13 21
23 31
31 43
41 13
11 21
21 31
31 43
41
14
14 22
24 32
34 44
44 14
14 22
24 32
34 44
42 14
14 22
24 32
32 44
42 14
12 22
22 32
32 44
42
SCHEMATICS
W LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 2-POLE, SIZES 0 (3) TO 12

118
LSZ0D711 LSZ3D811
First laterally mountable, left or right Second laterally mountable, left or right (only for sizes 3 to 12)
1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC

Left Right Left Right
W LSZ0D0.., LSZ0D9.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 1-POLE, SIZES 0 TO 12

for snapping onto the front, terminal designations according to EN 50005 or EN 50012
LSZ0D010 LSZ0D001 LSZ0D910 LSZ0D901

1 NO 1NC 1 NO 1NC
early make delayed
.3 .1 .7 .5
.4 .2 .8 .6
W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
W LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES, SIZES 0 TO 3

Terminal designations according to EN 50005. LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock (laterally mountable), integrated in reversing
contactor assemblies (reversing starters), contains 2 NC contacts for the electrical interlock, one for each contactor.
2 NC
111 1 3 5 1 3 5
111
K2
112
112
121
K1 K2
121
122 K1
122
2 4 6 2 4 6
SCHEMATICS
W CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
W MAIN CIRCUIT, SIZE 00 W CONTROL CIRCUIT, SIZE 00

The LSZDW001 wiring set contains, among other things, (The terminal designations for the contactors comply with Page
wiring connectors for connecting the main circuit. EN 50012). The LSZDW001 wiring set contains, among 119
other things, the electrical interlock.
L1
L2
L3
For momentary-contact For maintained-contact
F1
operation operation
L1/L+ L1/L+
K1 F3 F3
K2 95 95
F2 F2
96 96
S0
F2
UV W
10 2
M S2 S1
S
3~
53 53
S1 K1 S2 K2
54 54
22 22 22 22
K2 K1 K2 K1
21 21 21 21
A1 A1 A1 A1
K1 K2 K1 K2
N/L A2 A2 N/L A2 A2
W MAIN CIRCUIT, SIZES 0 TO 3 W CONTROL CIRCUIT, SIZES 0 TO 3

The LSZ.W001 wiring set contains, among other things, the (The terminal designations for the contactors comply with
wiring modules on the top and bottom for connecting the EN 50005). The LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock contains
main current paths. 2 NC contact, one for each contactor interlock.
L1
L2 operation operation
L3
F1
L1/L+ L1/L+
F3 F3
95 95
K1 F2 F2
K2 96 96
S0
F2 10 2
S2 S1 S
UV W
M .3 .3
3~
S1 K1 S2 K2
.4 .4
K2 112 K1 121 112 121

K2 K1
111 122 111 122
A1 A1 A1 A1
K1 K2 K1 K2
N/L A2 A2 N/L A2 A2
S0 Button "OFF"
S1 Button "Clockwise ON"
S2 Button "Counterclockwise ON"
S Button "CW-OFF-CCW"
K1 Clockwise contactor
K2 Counterclockwise contactor
F1 Fuses for main circuit
F3 Fuses for control circuit
F2 Thermal overload relays
SCHEMATICS
W CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR LSY WYE-DELTA STARTING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
W MAIN CIRCUIT, SIZES 0 TO 6 W CONTROL CIRCUIT, SIZES 0 TO 12

Page with LSZD0101 Y-Delta timer, laterally mounted (example
L1 3AC 50Hz ...V
120 L2
L3
circuits). The contact element K4:17/18 is only closed in the
F0
wye stage; the contact element is open in the delta stage
as well as in the de-energized state. S1 (S) is connected
K1 1 3 5 K3 1 3 5 K2
to clamping point K1:33.
2 4 6 2 4 6

F1 operation operation
U1 W2
V1 M U2
W1 3~ V2 L 1 (L + ) A C 5 0 H z (D C ) ...V L 1 (L + ) A C 5 0 H z (D C ) ...V
F 0 9 5 F 0 9 5
U1 F 1 F 1
W2 9 6
V1 M U2 9 6
W1 3~ V2
S 0
S 1 S
*
4 4 4 4
K 1 K 1
4 3 4 3
1 7 1 7
3 3 1 3 3 3 1 3 1 3
K 4 K 1 K 2 K 4 K 1 K 2 K 3
3 4 1 4 3 4 1 4 1 4
1 8 2 8 1 8 2 8
4 2 2 2 4 2 2 2
K 3 K 2 K 3 K 2
4 1 2 1 4 1 2 1
K 4 K 2 K 3 K 1 K 4 K 2 K 3 K 1
N (L ) N (L )
* Clamping point K1:44 remains unwired in this version
W MAIN CIRCUIT, SIZES 6 TO 12

L1 3AC 50Hz ...V
L2
L3
F0 F0
K1 1 3 5 K3 1 3 5 K2
2 4 6 2 4 6
S0 Button "OFF"
S1 Button "ON"
F1 S Maintained-contact switch
U1 W2 K1 Line contactor
V1 M U2
W1 3~ V2 K2 Star contactor
K3 Delta contactor
U1 W2 K4 Solid-state, time-delay auxiliary contact block or timing relay
V1 M U2 F0 Fuses
W1 3~ V2
F1 Thermal overload relays
SCHEMATICS
W CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS

Page
Typical circuit diagram Typical circuit diagram
Size 00 Sizes 0 and 3 121
L 1 L 2 L 3 L 1 L 2 L 3
F 0 F 0
1 3 5 1 4 3
1 /L 1
5 /L 3
3 /L 2
1 /L 1
3 /L 2
5 /L 3
A 1 A 1
A 2 A 2
2 /T 1
4 /T 2
6 /T 3
2 /T 1
4 /T 2
6 /T 3
1 4 5 2 4 4
C 1 C 1
Typical circuit diagram Circuit diagram with

quick discharge resistors
BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS
TOP-TECHNIC
Page
122
BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR, AC1, 1-POLE
TOP-TECHNIC
TOP-TECHNIC

BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS
Page
123
BZ MODULAR
CONTACTORS
w CONTENTS
DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 129
SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 130

MODULAR CONTACTORS
W BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOAD, AC OPERATED

W SCHRACK-INFO
• 1 Module = 17,5 mm
• Auxiliary contact block
see next page
BZ326471 BZ326453 BZ326463
DESCRIPTION COIL VOLTAGE FREQU/REMARK TYPE ORDER NO.
Page 1-POLE, 1 MODULE = 17,5 mm

Contactor AC1: 20A/400V, 1NO AC230V 50/60Hz R20–10 230 BZ326471
124 2-POLE, 1 MODULE = 17,5 mm
Contactor AC1: 20A/400V, 1NO+1NC AC24V 50/60Hz R20–11 24 BZ326421
Contactor AC1: 20A/400V, 2NC AC230V 50/60Hz R20–02 230 BZ326439
4-POLE, 2 MODULES = 35 mm
MODULAR CONTACTORS
W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK FOR BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS

W SCHRACK-INFO
• 2-pole
• 0,5 Module = 8,8 mm
• Max. 1 RH11 for 1 contactor
BZ326470
DESCRIPTION TYPE ORDER NO.

Auxiliary contact block AC15: 3A, 1NO+1NC RH11 BZ326470 Page
125
W BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR 4-POLE, SOLENOID OPERATED, SEALABLE

W SCHRACK-INFO
• Width = 45 mm
• No auxiliary contacts possible
BZ326441
DESCRIPTION COIL VOLTAGE FREQU/REMARK TYPE ORDER NO.

Contactor AC1: 20A/400V, 4NO AC230V 50/60Hz K1R40 230 BZ326441
W BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R..

acc. to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1
Lamp Type Power Current Capacitors Max. lamps per pole at 230V 50Hz and max. 60°C
W A µF R20.. R25.. R40.. R63.. K1R..
Incandescent lamps 60 0,27 - 22 28 58 85 28
100 0,45 - 13 17 35 51 17
200 0,91 - 7 8 17 25 8
300 1,36 - 4 5 11 16 5
500 2,27 - 3 3 7 10 3
1000 4,5 - 1 1 3 5 1
Fluorescent lamps 11 0,16 - 60 75 210 310 60
Page uncompensated or serial compensated 18 0,37 2,7 25 30 90 140 25

24 0,35 2,5 25 30 90 140 25
126 36 0,43 3,4 20 25 70 140 20
58 0,67 5,3 14 17 45 70 14
65 0,67 5,3 13 16 40 65 13
85 0,8 - 11 14 35 60 11
Fluorescent lamps 11 0,07 - 2 x 100 2 x 110 2 x 220 2 x 250 2 x 100
dual-connection 18 0,11 - 2 x 50 2 x 55 2 x 130 2 x 200 2 x 50
24 0,14 - 2 x 40 2 x 44 2 x 110 2 x 160 2 x 40
36 0,22 - 2 x 30 2 x 33 2 x 70 2 x 100 2 x 30
58 0,35 - 2 x 20 2 x 22 2 x 45 2 x 70 2 x 20
65 0,35 - 2 x 15 2 x 16 2 x 40 2 x 60 2 x 15
85 0,47 - 2 x 10 2 x 11 2 x 30 2 x 40 2 x 10
Fluorescent lamps 11 0,16 2,0 30 30 100 140 30
parallel compensated 18 0,37 2,0 20 20 70 90 20
24 0,35 3,0 15 15 55 75 15
36 0,43 4,5 10 10 38 51 10
58 0,67 7,0 6 6 25 30 6
65 0,67 7,0 5 5 24 28 5
85 0,8 8,0 4 4 18 23 4
Fluorescent lamps 18 0,09 - 40 40 100 150 40
with serial electronic 36 0,16 - 20 20 50 75 20
58 0,25 - 15 15 30 55 15
2 x 18 0,17 - 2 x 20 2 x 20 2 x 50 2 x 60 2 x 20
2 x 36 0,32 - 2 x 10 2 x 10 2 x 25 2 x 30 2 x 10
2 x 58 0,49 - 2x7 2x7 2 x 15 2 x 20 2x7
Transformers 20 - - 40 52 110 174 40
for metal halid low voltage lamps 50 - - 20 24 50 80 20
75 - - 13 16 35 54 13
100 - - 10 12 27 43 10
150 - - 7 9 19 29 7
200 - - 5 5 14 23 5
300 - - 3 4 9 14 3
Mercury-vapour lamps 50 0,61 - 16 18 38 55 16
(high-pressure lamps), uncompensated 80 0,8 - 12 14 28 40 12
e. g. HQL, HPL 125 1,15 - 8 9 20 28 8
250 2,15 - 4 5 11 15 4
400 3,25 - 3 4 7 10 3
700 5,4 - 1 2 4 6 1
1000 7,5 - 1 1 3 4 1
Mercury-vapour lamps 50 0,28 7 7 7 32 46 7
(high-pressure lamps), compensated 80 0,41 8 5 5 25 35 5
e. g. HQL, HPL 125 0,65 10 3 3 16 22 3
250 1,22 18 2 2 8 12 2
400 1,95 25 1 1 5 7 1
700 3,45 45 1 1 3 4 1
1000 4,8 60 - - 2 3 -
W BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R..

Lamp Type Power Current Capacitors Max. lamps per pole at 230V 50Hz and max. 60°C
W A µF R20.. R25.. R40.. R63.. K1R..
Metal halide lamps 35 0,53 - 22 24 45 65 22
uncompensated 70 1 - 12 14 24 35 12
e. g. HQI, HPI, CDM 150 1,8 - 6 8 13 18 6
250 3 - 4 5 8 12 4
400 3,5 - 3 4 6 10 3
1000 9,5 - 1 1 2 4 1
2000 16,5 - - - 1 2 -
400V per pole 2000 10,5 - - - 1 2 -
3500 18 - - - - 1 -
Metal halide lamps 35 0,25 6 8 8 38 50 8 Page
compensated 70 0,45 12 4 4 20 28 4
e. g. HQI, HPI, CDM 150 0,75 20 2 2 12 17 2 127
250 1,5 33 1 1 7 10 1
400 2,1 35 1 1 5 7 1
1000 5,8 95 - - 2 3 -
2000 11,5 148 - - 1 1 -
400V pro Pol 2000 6,6 58 - - 1 2 -
3500 11,6 100 - - - 1 -
Metal halide lamps 20 0,1 integrated 9 9 18 20 9
with serial electronic 35 0,2 integrated 6 6 11 13 6
(e. g.: PCI) 70 0,36 integrated 5 5 10 12 5
50-125 x In lamp for 0,6ms 150 0,7 integrated 4 4 8 10 4
Sodium-vapour lamps 35 1,5 - 7 9 22 30 7
(low pressure lamps), uncompensated 55 1,5 - 7 9 22 30 7
90 2,4 - 4 6 13 19 4
135 3,5 - 3 4 10 13 3
150 3,3 - 3 4 10 13 3
180 3,3 - 3 4 10 13 3
200 3,3 - 3 4 10 13 3
Sodium-vapour lamps 35 0,31 20 3 3 12 16 3
(low pressure lamps), compensated 55 0,42 20 2 2 8 14 2
90 0,63 30 1 1 5 9 1
135 0,94 45 1 1 3 6 1
150 1 40 1 1 3 6 1
180 1,16 40 1 1 2 5 1
200 1,32 25 - - 2 4 -
Sodium-vapour lamps 150 1,8 - 5 6 11 22 5
(high pressure lamps), uncompensated 250 3 - 4 5 7 13 4
330 3,7 - 3 4 6 10 3
400 4,7 - 2 2 5 8 2
1000 10,3 - 1 1 2 4 1
Sodium-vapour lamps 150 0,83 20 2 2 7 14 2
(high pressure lamps), compensated 250 1,5 33 1 1 4 8 1
330 2 40 1 1 3 6 1
400 2,4 48 1 1 2 5 1
1000 6,3 106 - - 1 2 -
Sodium-vapour lamps 20 0,1 integrated 9 9 18 20 9
(high pressure lamps) with serial electronic 35 0,2 integrated 6 6 11 13 6
(e. g.: PCI) 70 0,36 integrated 5 5 10 12 5
50-125 x In lamp for 0,6ms 150 0,7 integrated 4 4 8 10 4
W BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R.., RH11

Contactor Type R20.. R25.. R40.. R63.. K1R.. RH11

Main contacts
Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 440 2) 440 2) 440 2) 440 2) 690 1) 440 2)
Rated operation voltage Ue V AC 250 440 440 440 690 440
Frequency of operations AC1, AC3 1/h 300 300 600 600 600 600
Mechanical life S x 10 6
1 1 1 1 5 1
Rated operational current Ie (= Ith) open at 60°C A 20 25 40 63 20 -
Contact life S x 106 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,2 -
Page Minimum switch voltage V/mA 24/100 24/100 24/100 24/100 24/100 1 7/5
Short time current 10s-current A 72 72 216 240 96 -
128 Power loss per pole at Ie/AC1 W 2 2 3 7 1 0,5
Switching of three-phase motors, rated operational current Ie A - 9 27 30 12 -
Rated operational power of three-phase motors 220V kW - 2,2 7,5 8 3 -
50-60Hz 230-240V kW 1,1 4)
2,5 8 8,5 3 -
380-415V kW - 4 12,5 15 4 -
Contact life S x 106 - 0,15 0,15 0,15 0,9 -
AC operated inrush VA 7-9 14-18 33-45 33-45 3-3,5 -
sealed VA 2,2-4,2 4,4-8,4 7-10 7-10 3-3,5 -
W 0,8-1,6 1,6-3,2 2,6-3 2,6-3 3-3,5 -
Operation range of coils in multiples of control voltage Us (-40 to +40°C) 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 -
Coordination-type "1"
according to IEC 947-4-1, max. fuse size gL (gG) A 35 35 63 80 40 -
Cable cross-sections
Main connector solid or stranded mm² 1,5-10 1,5-10 2,5-25 2,5-25 0,5-2,5 3) 0,5-2,5 3)
flexible mm² 1,5-6 1,5-6 2,5-16 2,5-16 0,5-2,5 3) 0,5-2,5 3)
flexible with multicore cable end mm² 1,5-6 1,5-6 2,5-16 2,5-16 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5
Clamps per pole 1 1 1 1 2 2
Magnetic coil solid or stranded mm² 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 0,5-2,5 3) -
flexible mm² 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5 3) -
flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 -
Clamps per pole 1 1 1 1 2 -
Auxiliary Contacts
Rated insulation voltage Ui 1) V AC - - - - - 440 2)
Thermal rated current Ith 40°C A - - - - - 10
Ambient temperature 60°C A - - - - - 6
Rated operational current Ie 220-240V A - - - - - 3
380-415V A - - - - - 2
440V A - - - - - 1,6
Rated operational current Ie 24-60V A - - - - - 2
110V A - - - - - 0,4
per pole 220V A - - - - - 0,1
Short-circuit current 1kA, contact welding not accepted
max. fuse size gL (gG) A - - - - - 10
Switching time
At control voltage Us ±10% make time ms 7-16 9-15 11-15 11-15 15-19 -
release time ms 6-12 4-8 6-13 6-13 8-25 -
arc duration ms 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-15 -
1) Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. 3) Maximum cable cross-section with prepared conductor
2) Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to III, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 4kV. 4) AC5b motor 2-pole 230V 1,1kW
DIMENSIONS
W BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R40, RH11
W 1 MODULE W 2 MODULES
Page
129
W 3 MODULES
W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK W MODULAR CONTACTOR, SOLENOID OPERATED

BZ326470 BZ326441
SCHEMATICS
W CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR MODULAR CONTACTOR

BZ TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R40
W 1-POLE, 1 MODULE
R20-10 230
W 2-POLE, 1 MODULE
R20-20 24 R20-11 24 R20-02 230
Page R20-20 230 R20-11 230 R25-02 24
R25-02 230
130
W 4-POLE, 2 MODULES
R25-40 24 R25-31 24 R25-13 24 R25-04 24
R25-40 230 R25-31 230 R25-13 230
(21)
(22)
W 3-POLE, 3 MODULES
R40-30 230
W 4-POLE, 3 MODULES
R40-40 24
R40-40 230 R40-22 230
(13)
(14)
R63-40 24
R63-40 230 R63-31 230 R63-04 230
(21)
(22)
W 4-POLE
K1R40 230
W CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK
W 2-POLE, 0,5 MODULE

RH11
SCHEMATICS
W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MODULAR CONTACTOR

BZ TYPES R.., K1R40 AND AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK RH11
W TYPES R20.., R25.. – 1-POLE, 1 MODULE W TYPES R20.., R25.. – 2-POLE, 1 MODULE
1NO 2NO 1NO + 1NC 2NC
1 1 3 1 R3 R1 R3
A1 A1 A1 A1
A2 A2 A2 A2
2 2 4 2 R4 R2 R4
Page
131
W TYPES R25.. – 4-POLE, 2 MODULES
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 R7 1 R3 R5 R7 R1 R3 R5 R7
A1 A1 A1 A1
A2 A2 A2 A2
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 R8 2 R4 R6 R8 R2 R4 R6 R8
W TYPES R40.. – 3-POLE, 3 MODULES

3NO
A1
1 3 5
2 4 6
A2
W TYPES R40.., R63.. – 4-POLE, 3 MODULES

A1 A1 A1 A1
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 R7 1 3 R5 R7 R1 R3 R5 R7
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 R8 2 4 R6 R8 R2 R4 R6 R8
A2 A2 A2 A2
W TYPE K1R40 – 4-POLE, (WIDTH = 45 mm) W TYPE RH11 – 2-POLE, 0,5 MODULE
4NO 1NO + 1NC
13 23 33 43 A1 43
31
32
14 24 34 44 A2 44
LA MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
TOP-TECHNIC
LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS

FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3, 3POLE
Page TOP-TECHNIC
132
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS

FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
TOP-TECHNIC
SURGE SUPPRESSORS
FOR MINIATUR CONTACTORS
LA MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
Page
133
LA MINIATUR POWER AND

AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
w CONTENTS
DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 139
SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 140

MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
W LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE
LA100910

TYPE LA1
Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NO AC24V 50/60Hz LA100910
Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NC 1)
AC24V 50/60Hz LA100920
Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NO AC220-240V 50Hz LA100913
AC220-240V 50Hz LA100923
Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NO DC24V LA100915
DC24V LA100925
Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NO DC24V 2)
LA10091B
Page 1)
Additional auxiliary contact blocks for contactors with 1NC included: only LA190153, 154, 155, 156 to be used (for miniatur auxiliary contactors)
2)
With integrated coil-protection: diode + Z-diode
134
W LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 4POLE
LA100943

TYPE LA1
Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V AC220-240V 50Hz LA100943
Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V DC24V 2)
LA10094B
2)
With integrated coil-protection: diode + Z-diode
W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS

W SCHRACK-INFO
Auxiliary contact blocks for LA1 miniatur power contactors with 1 NO included.
For LA1 miniatur power contactors with 1 NC included, see next page.
LA190150

Auxiliary contact block 2NO+2NC DIN EN 50012 LA190150
MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
W LA1 MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS AC15 – 4POLE
LA100770

TYPE LA1
Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 4NO AC24V 50/60Hz LA100770
Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 4NO AC220-240V 50Hz LA100773
Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 4NO AC380-400V 50Hz LA100774
Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 3NO+1NC AC24V 50/60Hz LA100780
Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 3NO+1NC AC220-240V 50Hz LA100783
Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 2NO+2NC AC24V 50/60Hz LA100790
Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 2NO+2NC AC220-240V 50Hz LA100793
Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 2NO+2NC DC24V LA100795 Page
135
W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
W SCHRACK-INFO
Auxiliary contact blocks for all LA1 miniatur auxiliary contactors and also for LA1 miniatur
power contactors with 1 NC included.
LA190156

Auxiliary contact block 2NC DIN EN 50011 LA190155
Auxiliary contact block 4NO DIN EN 50011 LA190156
W SURGE SUPPRESSOR FOR MINIATUR CONTACTORS
LA190194

RC-Unit 250-415 VAC 50Hz LA190194
RC-Unit* 12-48 VAC/DC 50Hz LA190159
RC-Unit* 110-250 VAC/DC 50Hz LA190158
*Can be snapped on contactor.
W MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS LA1009..

acc. to IEC 947-4-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-4-1
Contactor Type LA1009..

Main contacts
Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 690 1)
Making capacity Ieff at Ue = 690V AC A 165
Breaking capacity Ieff 400V AC A 100
cosϕ = 0,65 500V AC A 90
690V AC A 80
Switching of resistive load
Rated operational current Ie (= Ith) open at 40°C A 20
Rated operational power of three-phase motors 230V kW 7,9
50-60Hz, cosϕ = 1 240V kW 8,3
400V kW 13,8
415V kW 14,3
Minimum cross-section of conductor at load with Ie (= Ith) mm² 2,5
Utilization category AC2 and AC3
Switching of three-phase motors
Rated operational current Ie 220V A 12
Page open and enclosed 230V A 11,5
240V A 11
136 380-400V A 9
415-440V A 8
500V A 7
660-690V A 5
Rated operational power of three-phase motors 220-240V kW 3
50-60Hz 380-400V kW 4
500-690V kW 4
Switching of squirrel cage motors, inching
open and enclosed 230V A 11,5
240V A 11
380-400V A 9
415-440V A 8
500V A 7
660-690V A 5
Rated operational power of three-phase motors 220-240V kW 3
50-60Hz 380-400V kW 4
500-690V kW 4
1) Suitable at 690V for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request.
W MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS LA1009..

acc. to IEC 947-4-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-4-1

Switching of resistive load 1 pole 24V A 20
Time constant L/R ≤1ms 60V A 20
220V A 0,6
3 poles in series 24V A 20
60V A 20
110V A 20
220V A 16
Utilization category DC3 and DC5
Switching of of shunt motors 1 pole 24V A 20
and series motors 60V A 5
Time constant L/R ≤1ms 110V A 1
Rated operational current Ie 220V A 0,15
3 poles in series 24V A 20
60V A 20
110V A 20
220V A 2 Page
Maximum ambient temperature
Operation open °C -40 to +60 (+90) 137
enclosed °C -40 to +40
with thermal overload relay open °C -25 to +60
enclosed °C -25 to +40
Storage °C -50 to +90
Short circuit protection for contactors without thermal overload relay
Coordination-type "1" according to IEC 947-4-1
Contact welding without hazard of persons, max. fuse size gL (gG) A 40
Coordination-type "2" according to IEC 947-4-1
Light contact welding accepted, max. fuse size gL (gG) A 25
Contact welding not accepted
max. fuse size gL (gG) A 10
For contactors with thermal overload relay the device with the smaller admissible
backup fuse (contactor or thermal overload relay) determines the fuse size.
Cable cross-sections for contactors without thermal overload relay
Main connector solid or stranded mm² 0,5-2,5
flexible mm² 0,5-2,5
flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-1,5
Clamps per pole 2
solid or stranded AWG 18-14
Frequency of operations
without load 1/h 10000
Contactors without thermal overload relay AC3, Ie 1/h 600
AC4, Ie 1/h 120
DC3, Ie 1/h 600
Mechanical life AC operated S x 106 5
DC operated S x 106 15
Short time current
10s-current A 96
Power loss
per pole at Ie/AC3 400V W 0,15
Resistance to shock according to IEC 68-2-27
Shock time 20ms sine-wave
AC operated NO g 5
NC g 5
DC operated NO g 8
NC g 6
1) With reduced control voltage range 0,9 up to 1,0 x Us and with reduced rated current Ie /AC1according to Ie /AC3
W MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS LA1009.., LA1007..

acc. to IEC 947-5-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-5-1
Contactor Type LA 100 7.. / LA 100 9.. AC operated LA 100 7.. / LA 100 9.. DC operated
Auxiliary contacts
Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 690 1) 690 1)
Thermal rated current Ith to 690V
Ambient temperature 40°C A 10 10
60°C A 6 6
Power loss
per pole at Ith W 0,5 0,5
Rated operational current Ie 220-240V A 3 3
380-415V A 2 2
440V A 1,6 1,6
500V A 1,2 1,2
660-690V A 0,6 0,6
Rated operational current Ie 60V A 2 2
110V A 0,4 0,4
220V A 0,1 0,1
Maximum ambient temperature
Page
Operation open °C -40 to +60 (+90) 3) -40 to +60 (+90) 3)
138 enclosed °C -40 to +40 -40 to +40
Storage °C -50 to +90 -50 to +90
Short-circuit current 1kA
Contact welding not accepted, max. fuse size gL (gG) A 20 20
For contactors with thermal overload relay the device with the smaller admissible
control fuse (contactor or thermal overload relay) determines the fuse size.
AC operated inrush VA 25 -
sealed VA 4-5 -
W 1,2 -
DC operated inrush W - 2,5
sealed W - 2,5
Operation range of coils
in multiples of control voltage Us 0,85-1,1 0,8-1,1
Switching time at control voltage Us ±10% 4) 5)
AC operated make time ms 15-25 -
release time ms 8-25 -
arc duration ms 10-15 -
DC operated make time ms - 15-19
release time ms - 8-25
arc duration ms - 10-15
Cable cross-sections
all connectors solid mm² 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5
flexible mm² 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5
flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5
Clamps per pole 2 2
solid or stranded AWG 18-14 18-14
1) Suitable at 690V for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request.
3) With reduced control voltage range 0,9 up to 1,0 x Us and with reduced thermal rated current Ith to Ie /AC15.
4) Summary switching time = release time + arc duration
5) Release time of NC make time of NO increase when suppressor units for voltage peak protection are used (Varistor, RC-units, Diode units).
DIMENSIONS
W MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
W CONTACTORS W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK

LA1007.., LA1009.. LA19015.
AC and DC operated
LA 100 9..
LA 101 2..
W ACCESSORY FOR MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS Page
W RC UNIT 139
LA190194
SCHEMATICS
W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
W 3-POLE W 4-POLE
terminal designations according to EN 50012 terminal designations according to EN 50005
LA10091. LA10092. LA10094.
1 NO included 1 NC included 4 NO
W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
W 4-POLE
terminal designations according to EN 50011
LA10077. LA10078. LA10079.
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Page
140
W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MINIATUR CONTACTORS
W FOR POWER CONTACTORS WITH 1 NO INCLUDED

LA190150 LA190151
2 NO + 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
W FOR POWER CONTACTORS WITH 1 NC INCLUDED AND ALL AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

LA100153 LA190154 LA100155 LA190156

2 NO + 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC 4 NO
SCHEMATICS
W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
W 3-POLE W 4-POLE
Terminal designations according to EN 50012 Terminal designations according to EN 50005
LA10091. LA10092. LA10094.

1 NO included 1 NC included 4 NO
1 3 5 13 A1 ! # ) ! # 7 )
2 4 6 14 A2 " $ ) " $ 8 )
W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
W 4-POLE
Page
LA10077. LA10078. LA10079. 141

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC

13 !
23 #
33
43 ) A1

13 !
21 #
33
43 ) A1

13 !
21 #
31
43 ) A1

14 "
24 $
34 44 ) A2 14 "
22 $
34 44 ) A2 14 "
22 $
32 44 ) A2
W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS

FOR MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
W FOR POWER CONTACTORS WITH 1 NO INCLUDED
front mounted auxiliary contact blocks, terminal designations according to EN 50012
LA190150 LA190151
2 NO + 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
13
21 21
31 31
43 43
53 13
21 21 31
33 43
14
22 22
32 32
44 44
54 14
22 22 32
34 44
W FOR POWER CONTACTORS WITH 1 NC INCLUDED AND ALL AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

front mounted auxiliary contact blocks, terminal designations according to EN 50005
LA190153 LA190154 LA190155 LA190156

2 NO + 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC 4 NO
13
51 21
61 31
73 43
83 13
51 21 31
63 43 13
51 21 31
61 43 13
53 21
63 31
73 43
83
14
52 22
62 32
74 44
84 14
52 22 32
64 44 14
52 22 32
62 44 14
54 22
64 32
74 44
84
ALEA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
LSTD LST0
Page
142
LST2 LST3
ALEA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
ALEA THERMAL
Page
OVERLOAD RELAYS 143
w CONTENTS
OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................. Page 144
ACCESSORIES ........................................................................................................ Page 156
CHARAKTERISTIC CURVES .............................................................................. Page 157
DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 158
SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 159

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
W LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS – OVERVIEW
LSTD LST0 LST2 LST3
FEATURES BENEFITS LST

GENERAL DATA
SIZES • Are coordinated with the dimensions, connections and technical S00 ... S3
characteristics of the other devices in the ALEA modular system
• Permit the mounting of slim and compact load feeders in widths
of 45 mm (S00), 45 mm (S0), 55 mm (S2), 70 mm (S3)
• Simplify configuration
SEAMLESS CURRENT RANGE • Allows easy and consistent configuration with one series of
overload relays (for small to large loads) 0.11 ... 100 A
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
TRIPPING IN THE EVENT OF OVERLOAD • Provides optimum inverse-time delayed protection of ✓
loads against excessive temperature rises due to overload
TRIPPING IN THE EVENT OF PHASE UNBALANCE • Provides optimum inverse-time delayed protection of loads ✓
against excessive temperature rises due to phase unbalance
TRIPPING IN THE EVENT OF PHASE FAILURE • Minimizes heating of induction motors during phase failure ✓
PROTECTION OF SINGLE-PHASE LOADS • Enables the protection of single-phase loads ✓
FEATURES
RESET FUNCTION • Allows manual or automatic resetting of the relay ✓
REMOTE RESET FUNCTION (ON REQUEST) • Allows the remote resetting of the relay ✓(by means of separate module)
TEST FUNCTION FOR AUXILIARY CONTACTS • Allows easy checking of the function and wiring ✓
Page STATUS DISPLAYS • Displays the current operating state ✓
LARGE CURRENT ADJUSTMENT BUTTON • Makes it easier to set the relay exactly to the correct current value ✓
144 INTEGRATED AUXILIARY CONTACTS (1 NO + 1 NC) • Allows the load to be switched off if necessary ✓
• Can be used to signal output ✓
DESIGN OF LOAD FEEDERS
SHORT-CIRCUIT STRENGTH UP TO 100 KA AT 690 V • Provides optimum protection of the loads and operating personnel ✓
(in conjunction with the corresponding fuses in the event of short-circuits due to insulation faults or faulty
or the corresponding motor starter protector) switching operations
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL MATCHING • Simplifies configuration ✓
TO CONTACTORS LSSD, LSDD, LSD0, LSD2, LSD3 • Reduces wiring outlay and costs ✓
• Enables stand-alone installation as well as space-saving direct mounting ✓
SPRING-LOADED TERMINAL CONNECTION • Enables fast and maintenance-free connections S00

SYSTEM FOR MAIN CIRCUIT (ON REQUEST) • Permits vibration-resistant connections
SPRING-LOADED TERMINAL CONNECTION • Enables fast and maintenance-free connections

SYSTEM FOR AUXILIARY CIRCUITS (ON REQUEST) • Permits vibration-resistant connections
OTHER FEATURES
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION • Allows the use of the relays at high temperatures without derating ✓
• Prevents premature tripping ✓
• Allows compact installation of the control cabinet without distance ✓
between the devices/load feeders
• Simplifies configuration ✓
• Enables space to be saved in the control cabinet ✓
VERY HIGH LONG-TERM STABILITY • Provides safe protection for the loads even after years of use in ✓
severe operating conditions
W LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS – OVERVIEW
LSTD LST0 LST2 LST3
TYPE LSTD / LST0 / LST2 / LST3
APPLICATIONS
System protection ✓1)
Motor protection ✓
Alternating current, 3-phase ✓
Alternating current, 1-phase ✓
DC current ✓
SIZE OF CONTACTOR S00, S0, S2, S3
RATED OPERATIONAL CURRENT In
SIZE S00 up to 12A
SIZE S0 up to 25A
SIZE S2 up to 50A
SIZE S3 up to 100A
RATED OPERATIONAL VOLTAGE Ue 690/1000 VAC2)
RATED FREQUENCY 50/60 Hz
TRIP CLASS Class 10
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELEASE 0.11 ... 0.16A
up to 80 ... 100A
RATING FOR INDUCTION MOTOR AT 400 V AC 0.04 KW up to 45 KW Page
ACCESSORIES FOR SIZES S00 S0 S2 S3
Terminal brackets for stand-alone installation ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
145
Mechanical RESET ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Cable release for RESET ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Electrical remote RESET ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Terminal covers -- -- ✓ ✓
Sealable covers for setting knobs integrated integrated integrated integrated
1)
The units are responsible in the main circuit for overload protection of the assigned electrical loads
(e.g. motors), feeder cable and other switching and protection devices in the respective load feeder.
2)
Size 3 up to 1000 V AC.
✓ Has this function or can use this accessory.
-- Does not have this function or cannot use this accessory.
W LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS – GENERAL INFORMATIONS
OVERLOAD RELAYS CURRENT MEASUREMENT CURRENT RANGE CONTACTORS (TYPE, SIZE, RATING IN kW)
LSSD+LSDD/S00 LSS0+LSD0/S0 LSD2/S2 LSD3/S3
TYPE TYPE A 3/4/5.5 5.5/7.5/11 15/18.5/22 30/37/45
LSTD integrated 0.11 … 12 ✓ -- -- --

LST0 integrated 1.8 … 25 -- ✓ -- --
LST2 integrated 5.5 … 50 -- -- ✓ --
LST3 integrated 18 … 100 -- -- -- ✓
W CONNECTION
Connection of the auxiliary circuit
Connection type Screw terminals
• Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors
- solid mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 4), 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
- finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 –
- finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)
- stranded mm2 –
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 × (20 ... 14)
Connection type Spring-loaded terminals on request for size 00
- solid mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
- finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 --
- finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
- stranded mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 × (24 ... 16)
Page
146
1 (1) Connection for mounting onto contactors: Optimally adapted in electrical, mechanical and design terms to the
contactors and soft starters, these connecting pins can be used for direct mounting of the overload relays. Stand-
alone installation is possible as an alternative (in some cases in conjunction with a stand-alone installation module).
2 (2) Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET and RESET button: With this switch you can choose between manual
3 and automatic RESET. A device set to manual RESET can be reset locally by pressing the RESET button. A remote
RESET is possible using the RESET modules (accessories), which are independent of size (on request).
5 4 (3) Switch position indicator and TEST function of the wiring: Indicates a trip and enables the wiring test.
6 (4) Motor current setting: Setting the device to the rated motor current is easy with the large rotary knob.
(5) STOP button: If the STOP button is pressed, the NC contact is opened. This switches off the contactor downstream.
The NC contact is closed again when the button is released.
(6) Transparent, sealable cover Secures the motor current setting, TEST function and the selector switch for manual/
7 automatic RESET against adjustment.
(7) Supply terminals: The generously sized terminals permit connection of two conductors with different cross-sections
for the main and auxiliary circuits. The auxiliary circuit can be connected with screw terminals and alternatively with
spring-loaded terminals (on request).
W SCHRACK INFO
The LST thermal overload relays up to 100 A have been designed for inverse-time delayed protection of loads with
normal starting against excessive temperature rises due to overload or phase failure. An overload or phase failure results
in an increase of the motor current beyond the set rated motor current. Via heating elements, this current rise heats up
the bimetal strips inside the device which then bend and as a result trigger the auxiliary contacts by means of a tripping
mechanism. The auxiliary contacts then switch off the load by means of a contactor. The break time depends on the ratio
between the tripping current and set current Ie and is stored in the form of a long-term stable tripping characteristic. The
"tripped" status is signaled by means of a switch position indicator. Resetting takes place either manually or automatically
after the recovery time has elapsed. The devices are manufactured in accordance with environmental guidelines and
contain environmentally friendly and reusable materials.
W DESIGN AND FUNCTION

Page
W DEVICE CONCEPT
The LST thermal overload relays are compact devices, i.e. current measurement and the evaluation unit are integrated in a 147
single enclosure.
W MOUNTING OPTIONS
The LST thermal overload relays can be mounted directly onto the LSS/LSD contactors (exception: size 00 with Cage Clamp
connection can only be installed as a stand-alone installation). The devices can also be installed as stand-alone installations
with the corresponding terminal brackets.
W CONNECTION METHOD
All sizes of the LST thermal overload relays with screw terminal can be connected to the auxiliary and main current paths.
Rails can be connected to the main conductor connections of size 3 overload relays if the box terminals are removed.
As an alternative, the devices are also available with Cage Clamp terminals. The auxiliary conductor connections of these
devices, and for size 00 the main conductor connections as well, are fitted with Cage Clamp terminals (on request).
W OVERLOAD RELAYS IN CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES FOR WYE-DELTA STARTING

When overload relays are used in combination with contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting it must be noted that only
0.58 times the motor current flows through the line contactor. An overload relay mounted onto the line contactor must
be set to 0.58 times the motor current. An assignment of the LST thermal overload relays to the line contactors of our
LSY contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting can be found under "Power and Auxiliary Contactors".
W OPERATION WITH FREQUENCY CONVERTER

The LST thermal overload relays are suitable for operation with frequency converters. Depending on the frequency of the
converter, a higher current than the motor current must be used in some cases due to eddy-currents and skin effects.
W BASIC FUNCTIONS
The LST thermal overload relays are designed for:
• Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from overloading
• Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from phase failure
W CONTROL CIRCUIT
The LST thermal overload relays do not require an additional supply voltage for operation.
W SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION
Fuses or motor starter protectors must be used for short-circuit protection.
W TRIP CLASSES
The LST thermal overload relays are available for normal starting conditions with trip class 10.
W PHASE FAILURE PROTECTION

The LST thermal overload relays are fitted with phase failure sensitivity in order to minimize temperature rises of the load
in the case of a phase failure during single-phase operation.
W SETTING
The LST thermal overload relays are set to the rated motor current by means of a rotary knob. The scale of the rotary
knob is shown in ampere.
W MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC RESET

Automatic and manual reset is selected by pressing and turning the blue button (RESET button). If the button is set to
manual reset, the overload relay can be reset directly by pressing the RESET button. Resetting is possible in combination
with mechanical and electrical reset options from the range of accessories. If the blue button is set to automatic RESET,
the relay is reset automatically. The time between tripping and resetting is determined by the recovery time.
Page
148 W RECOVERY TIME

After tripping due to overload, the LST thermal overload relays require some time until the bimetal strips have cooled
down. The device can only be reset after the bimetal strips have cooled down. This time (recovery time) depends on the
tripping characteristics and strength of the tripping current. The recovery time allows the load to cool down after
tripping due to overload.
W TEST FUNCTION
The TEST slide can be used to check whether the operational LST thermal overload relay is working properly. Actuating
the slide simulates tripping of the relay. During this simulation the NC contact (95-96) is opened and the NO contact (97-
98) is closed. This tests whether the auxiliary circuit has been correctly connected to the overload relay. If the LST
thermal overload relay has been set to automatic RESET, the overload relay is automatically reset when the TEST slide is
released. The relay must be reset with the RESET button if it has been set to manual RESET.
W STOP FUNCTION
If the STOP button is pressed, the NC contact is opened. This switches off the contactor downstream and thus the load.
The load is switched on again when the STOP button is released.
W DISPLAY OF THE OPERATING STATE

The respective operating state of the LST thermal overload relay is displayed by means of the position of the marking on
the TEST function/switch position indicator slide. After tripping due to overload or phase failure, the marking on the slide
is to left on the "O" mark, otherwise it is on the "I" mark.
W AUXILIARY CONTACTS
The LST thermal overload relays are fitted with an NO contact for the "tripped" signal, and an NC contact for
disconnecting the contactor.
W LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY, SIZE 00
LSTD....

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY SIZE 00
Thermal overload relay 0,11...0,16 A LSTD0016
Thermal overload relay 0,7...1 A LSTD0100
Thermal overload relay 5,5...8 A LSTD0800 Page
Thermal overload relay 7...10 A LSTD1000
149
Thermal overload relay 9...12 A LSTD1200
LST0....

Thermal overload relay 1,8...2,5 A LST00250
Thermal overload relay 2,8...4 A LST00400
Thermal overload relay 7...10 A LST01000
Thermal overload relay 9...12,5 A LST01250
LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
LST2....

Thermal overload relay 9...12,5 A LST21250
Page
150
LST3....

W HOLDER FOR LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
LSZ....
DESCRIPTION SIZE ORDER NO.

Holder for stand-alone installation 00 LSZDTE01
Holder for stand-alone installation 0 LSZ0TE01
W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LSTD, LST0, LST2, LST3
Type LSTD LST0 LST2 LST3

Size 00 0 2 3
Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm
General data
Trips in the event of Overload and phase failure
Trip class acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 CLASS 10
Phase failure sensitivity Yes
Overload warning No
Reset and recovery
• Reset options after tripping Manual, automatic and remote RESET1)
• Recovery time
- for automatic RESET min Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic
- for manual RESET min Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic
- for remote RESET min Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic
Features
• Display of operating state on device Yes, by means of TEST function/switch position indicator slide
• TEST function Yes
• RESET button Yes
• STOP button Yes
Ambient temperature
• Storage/transport °C -55 ... +80
• Operation °C -20 ... +70
• Temperature compensation °C Up to 60
• Permissible rated current at
- temperature inside control cabinet 60 °C % 100 (over +60 °C current reduction is not required)
- temperature inside control cabinet 70 °C % 87
Repeat terminals
• Coil repeat terminal Yes Not required
• Auxiliary contact repeat terminal Yes Not required
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529 IP20 IP202)
Touch protection acc. to IEC 61140 Finger-safe
Shock resistance with sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 8/10
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Interference immunity
• Conductor-related interference
- burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 (corresponds to degree of severity 3) kV EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays
- surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 (corresponds to degree of severity 3) kV EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays
Page
• Electrostatic discharge acc. to IEC 61000-4-2 kV EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays
(corresponds to degree of severity 3)
151
• Field-related interference acc. to IEC 61000-4-3 V/m EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays
(corresponds to degree of severity 3)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Emitted interference EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays
Resistance to extreme climates – Air humidity % 100
Dimensions See dimensional drawings
Installation altitude above sea level m Up to 2000; above this, please enquire
Mounting position The diagrams show the permissible mounting positions for direct mounting and
stand-alone installation. For installation in the hatched area, a setting correction
of 10 % must be implemented.
Stand-alone installation:
0 °
4 5 ° 0 ° 4 5 °
1 e x 1 ,1 1 e x 1 ,1
9 0 ° 9 0 °
1 3 5 ° 1 3 5 ° N S B 0 1 3 6 4
1 e x 1 ,1
Contactor + overload relay:

0 ° 0 °
2 2 ,5 ° 2 2 ,5 °
1 3 5 ° 1 3 5 ° N S B 0 1 3 6 3
1 e x 1 ,1
Type of mounting Direct mounting3)/ Direct mounting/stand-alone installation with

stand-alone stand alone holder
installation with
stand alone holder
1) Remote RESET in combination with the corresponding accessories (on request).

2) Terminal compartment: degree of protection IP00.
3) The LSTD thermal overload relay with Cage Clamp terminals can only be used as a stand-alone installation.

Size 00 0 2 3
Main circuit
Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) V 690 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6 8
Rated operational voltage Ue V 690 1000
Type of current
• Direct current Yes
• Alternating current Yes, frequency range up to 400 Hz
Set current A 0.11 ... 0.16 to 1.8 ... 2.5 to 5.5 ... 8 to 18 ... 25 to
9 ... 12 20 ... 25 40 ... 50 80 ... 100
Power loss per unit (max.) W 3.9 ... 6.6 3.9 ... 6 6 ... 9 10 ... 16.5
• With fuse without contactor
• With fuse and contactor See "Technical specifications" (short-circuit protection with fuses/motor starter protectors
for motor feeders)
Safe isolation between main and auxiliary V 500 690
conducting path acc. to IEC 60947-1
Connection for main circuit
Connection type Screw terminals with box terminal
• Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 Allen screw 4mm
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5 3 ... 4.5 4 ... 6
• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.),
1 or 2 conductors
- solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2) 2 x (1 ... 2.5)2) 2 x (0.75 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 16)
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)2)
Max. 2 x (1 ... 4)2) Max. 2 x (2.5 ... 102) )
- finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2) 2 x (1 ... 2.5)2) 2 x (0.75 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 35)
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)2) 1 x (0.75 ... 25) 1 x (2.5 ... 50)
- stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2) 2 x (1 ... 2.5)2) 2 x (0.75 ... 25) 2 x (10 ... 50)
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)2) 1 x (0.75 ... 35) 1 x (10 ... 70)
Max. 2 x (1 ... 4)2) Max. 2 x (2.5 ... 10)2)
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14) 2 x (14 ... 10) 2 x (18 ... 3) 2 x (10 ... 1/0)
1 x (18 ... 1) 1 x (10 ... 2/0)
Page - ribbon cable conductors (number x width x thickness) mm -- 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
Busbar connection Busbar connection1)
152 • Terminal screw -- M6 x 20
• Tightening torque Nm -- 4 ... 6
• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.)
- finely stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 2 x 70
- stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 3 x 70
- AWG cables, solid or stranded, with cable lug AWG -- 2/0
- with connecting bar (max. width) mm -- 12
Connection type Cage Clamp terminals on request
- solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5) --
- finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5) --
- finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5) --
- stranded mm2 -- --
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 14) --
1) The box terminal is removable. Rail and cable lug connections are possible if the box terminal is removed.
2) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply.

Size 00 0 2 3
Auxiliary circuit
Number of NO contacts 1
Number of NC contacts 1
Auxiliary contacts – assignment 1 NO for the signal "tripped",
1 NC for disconnecting the contactor
Contact rating of the auxiliary contacts
• NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15,
rated operational current Ie at Ue:
- 24 V A 4
- 120 V A 4
- 125 V A 4
- 230 V A 3
- 400 V A 2
- 600 V A 0.6
- 690 V A 0.5
• NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15,
- 24 V A 3
- 120 V A 3
- 125 V A 3
- 230 V A 2
- 400 V A 1
- 600 V A 0.6
- 690 V A 0.5
• NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13,
- 24 V A 1
- 60 V A 1)
- 110 V A 0.22
- 125 V A 0.22 Page
- 220 V A 0.11
• Continuous thermal current Ith A 62) 153
• Contact reliability (suitability for PLC control; 17 V, 5 mA) Yes
• With fuse
- gL/gG operational class A 6
- Quick A 10
•With miniature circuit breaker (C characteristic) A 6
Safe isolation between main and auxiliary conducting V 415
path acc. to IEC 60947-1
CSA, UL, UR rated data
Auxiliary circuit – switching capacity B600, R300
Connection of the auxiliary circuit
• Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
- solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)3) , 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)3)
- finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)3), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)3)
- stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)3), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)3)
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)
Connection type Cage Clamp terminals on request
- solid 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
- finely stranded without end sleeve 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
- finely stranded with end sleeve 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
- stranded --
- AWG cables, solid or stranded 2 x (24 ... 14)
1) On request.
2) Up to I k ≤ 0.5 kA; ≤ 260 V.
3) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified.
If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply.

W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS SIZE 00 AND SIZE 0

Short-circuit protection with fuses/motor starter protectors for motor feeders
With short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 50/60 Hz 690 V AC Permissible short-circuit protection fuse for motor starters
comprising overload relay and contactor, type of coordination "2"1)
Overload relays 3 kW Ⳏ LSSD/LSDD07 4 kW Ⳏ LSSD/LSDD09 5.5 kW Ⳏ LSSD/LSDD12 UL-listed fuses

Setting range Ie max = 7 A Ie max = 9 A Ie max = 12 A RK5
(at 50 Hz 400 V AC) (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) (at 50 Hz 400 V AC)
A gL/gG aM BS 88 gL/gG aM BS 88 gL/gG aM BS 88 A
Size 00
0.11 ... 0.16 0.5 -- -- 0.5 -- – 0.5 – – 1
0.14 ... 0.2 1 -- -- 1 -- – 1 – – 1
0.18 ... 0.25 1 -- -- 1 -- – 1 – – 1
0.22 ... 0.32 1.6 -- 2 1.6 -- 2 1.6 – 2 1
0.28 ... 0.4 2 -- 2 2 -- 2 2 – 2 1.6
0.35 ... 0.5 2 -- 2 2 -- 2 2 – 2 2
0.45 ... 0.63 2 -- 4 2 -- 4 2 – 4 2.5
0.55 ... 0.8 4 -- 4 4 -- 4 4 – 4 3
0.7 ... 1 4 -- 6 4 -- 6 4 – 6 4
0.9 ... 1.25 4 -- 6 4 -- 6 4 – 6 5
1.1 ... 1.6 6 -- 10 6 -- 10 6 – 10 6
1.4 ... 2 6 -- 10 6 -- 10 6 – 10 8
1.8 ... 2.5 10 -- 10 10 -- 10 10 – 10 10
2.2 ... 3.2 10 -- 16 10 -- 16 10 – 16 12
2.8 ... 4 16 -- 16 16 -- 16 16 – 16 16
3.5 ... 5 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 20
4.5 ... 6.3 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 25
5.5 ... 8 20 10 20 20 10 20 20 10 20 30
7 ... 10 -- -- -- 20 16 20 20 16 20 40
9 ... 12 -- -- -- -- -- -- 20 16 25 45
Overload relays 5.5 kW Ⳏ LSS0/LSD012 7.5 kW Ⳏ LSS0/LSD017 5.5 kW Ⳏ LSS0/LSD025 UL-listed fuses
Page
154 Size 0
1.8 ... 2.5 10 – 10 10 – 10 10 – 10 10
2.2 ... 3.2 10 – 16 10 – 16 10 – 16 12
2.8 ... 4 16 – 16 16 – 16 16 – 16 16
3.5 ... 5 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 20
4.5 ... 6.3 20 6 25 20 6 25 20 6 25 25
5.5 ... 8 25 10 25/322) 25 10 25/322) 25 10 32 30
7 ... 10 25 16 25/322) 25 16 25/322) 32 16 35 40
9 ... 12.5 25 20 25/322) 25 20 25/322) 35 20 35 45
11 ... 16 25 20 25/322) 25 20 25/322) 35 20 35 60
14 ... 20 -- -- -- 25 20 25/322) 35 20 35 80
17 ... 22 -- -- -- -- -- -- 35 20 35 80
20 ... 25 -- -- -- -- -- -- 35 20 35 100
1) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices according to IEC60947-4-1:

The contactor or starter must not endanger persons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit.
Type of coordination 1: The contactor or the starter may be non-operational after every short-circuit release.
Type of coordination 2: The contactor or the starter must be operational after a short-circuit release (without replacement of parts).
Welding of the contacts is permissible however.
2) At max. 415 V.
W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS SIZE 2 AND SIZE 3

Short-circuit protection with fuses/motor starter protectors for motor feeders
With short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 50/60 Hz 690 V AC Permissible short-circuit protection fuse for motor starters
comprising overload relay and contactor, type of coordination "2"1)
Overload relays 3 kW Ⳏ LSD232 4 kW Ⳏ LSD240 5.5 kW Ⳏ LSD250 UL-listed fuses

Size 2
5.5 ... 8 25 10 25 25 10 25 25 10 25 30
7 ... 10 32 16 32 32 16 32 32 16 32 40
9 ... 12.5 35 16 35 35 16 35 35 16 35 50
11 ... 16 40 20 40 40 20 40 40 20 40 60
14 ... 20 50 25 50 50 25 50 50 25 50 80
18 ... 25 63 32 63 63 32 63 63 32 63 100
22 ... 32 63 35 63 63 35 63 80 35 80 125
28 ... 40 63 50 63 63 50 63 80 50 80 150
36 ... 45 -- -- -- 63 50 80 80 50 80 175
40 ... 50 -- -- -- -- -- -- 80 50 80 200
Overload relays 30 kW Ⳏ LSD365 37 kW Ⳏ LSD380 45 kW Ⳏ LSD395 UL-listed fuses

Size 3
18 ... 25 63 32 63 63 32 63 63 32 63 100
22 ... 32 80 35 80 80 35 80 80 35 80 125
28 ... 40 80 50 80 80 50 80 80 50 80 150
36 ... 50 125 50 125 125 50 125 125 50 125 200
45 ... 63 125 63 125 160 63 160 160 63 160 250
57 ... 75 -- -- -- 160 80 160 160 80 160 300
70 ... 90 -- -- -- -- -- -- 160 100 160 350
80 ... 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- 160 100 160 350
Page
1) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices according to IEC60947-4-1:

155
The contactor or starter must not endanger persons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit.
Type of coordination 1: The contactor or the starter may be non-operational after every short-circuit release.
Type of coordination 2: The contactor or the starter must be operational after a short-circuit release (without replacement of parts).
Welding of the contacts is permissible however.
ACCESSORIES
W ACCESSORIES FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
W OVERVIEW
The following accessories are available for the LST thermal overload relays:
• For the four overload relay sizes 00 to 3 one terminal bracket each for stand-alone installation
• One mechanical RESET module for all sizes on request
• One cable release for resetting devices which are difficult to access (for all sizes) on request
• Terminal covers
Stand-alone holder
Type LSZDTE01 LSZ0TE01 LSZ2TE01 LSZ3TE01

For overload relays LSTD LST0 LST2 LST3
Mounting type For screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rails, size S3 also for TH 75 standard mounting rails
Connection for main circuit
Connection type Screw terminals Screw terminals with box terminal
• Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 Allen screw 4 mm
• Conductor cross-section (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors
- solid mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 x (1 ... 6), 2 x (0.75 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 16)
max. 1 x (... 4) max. 1 x (... 10)
- finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5) 1 x (1 ... 6) 2 x (0.75 ... 16), 2 x (2.5 ... 35),
1 x (0.75 ... 25) 1 x (2.5 ... 50)
- stranded mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 x (1 ... 6), 2 x (0.75 ... 25), 2 x (10 ... 50),
max. 1 x (... 4) max. 1 x (... 10) 1 x (0.75 ... 35) 1 x (10 ... 70)
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 1 x (18 ... 14) 1 x (14 ... 10) 2 x (18 ... 3), 2 x (10 ... 1/0),
1 x (18 ... 1) 1 x (10 ... 2/0)
- ribbon cable conductors (number x width x thickness) mm -- -- 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
Page
156
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES
W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS – CHARACTERISTIC CURVES

The tripping characteristics show the relationship between the tripping time and tripping current as multiples of the set
current Ie and are given for symmetrical three-pole and two-pole loads from the cold state. The smallest current used for
tripping is called the minimum tripping current. According to IEC 60947-4-1, this current must be within specified limits.
The limits of the minimum tripping current for the LST thermal overload relays for symmetrical three-pole loads are
between 105 % and 120 % of the set current. The tripping characteristic starts with the minimum tripping current and
continues with higher tripping currents based on the characteristics of the so-called trip classes (CLASS 10, CLASS 20
etc.). The trip classes describe time intervals within which the overload relays have to trip with 7.2 times the set current
Ie from the cold state for symmetrical three-pole loads.
The tripping characteristic for a three-pole LST thermal overload relay (see characteristic curve for symmetrical three-pole
loads from the cold state) only applies if all three bimetal strips are simultaneously loaded with the same current. If only
two bimetal strips are heated due to a phase failure, these two strips alone must generate the necessary force to trigger
the tripping mechanism which would result in a longer tripping time or require a higher current. If these higher currents
are applied over a longer period, they usually cause damage to the load. To avoid damage, the LST thermal overload
relays are fitted with phase failure sensitivity which ensures faster tripping in accordance with the characteristic curve for
double-pole loads from the cold state by means of a suitable mechanical mechanism. Compared with a cold load, a load
at operating temperature obviously has a lower temperature reserve. This is taken into account by the LST thermal over-
load relays by reducing the tripping time to about 25 % when loaded with the set current Ie for an extended period.
The tripping times are as follows for:
Trip class Tripping times

CLASS 10A 2 s ... 10 s
CLASS 10 4 s ... 10 s
CLASS 20 6 s ... 20 s
CLASS 30 9 s ... 30 s
W SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATION OF A CHARACTERISTIC CURVE

Page
The characteristic curves for the individual LST thermal overload relays can be requested from Technical Assistance.
157
Tripping time
10 000
100 5000
min
60 s
40
2000
1000
10
500
5
200
2
100
3-pole
1 loading
50
20 2-pole
loading
10
1
0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20 30 40 A 60 80 x 1 n
Current
DIMENSIONS
W SCREW CONNECTION
Lateral distance to grounded components: at least 6 mm.
W LSTD, SIZE 00 W LST0, SIZE 0

with mechanical RESET (on request) with terminal bracket for stand-alone installation
min. 28...max. 130 6)

6) max. 185
148
46 32
17,4 12 12
47
118
3)
61
41
2) 5) 4)
24
1)
max. 8
15,5 5 33
10
45 49
68
1)
Mechanical RESET. 6)
For mounting on TH35-7,5 standard mounting rail according to EN 60715.
2)
Cable release (400 or 600 mm long, mounting on the front or laterally on the holder).
3)
Holder for RESET.
4)
Pushbutton.
5)
Extension plunger.
6)
For mounting on TH35-7,5 standard mounting rail according to EN 60715.
W LST2, SIZE 2 W LST3, SIZE 3

with terminal bracket for stand-alone installation with terminal bracket for stand-alone installation
5 5 1 7 9
5 7
5 0
5 4
5 7
6 2
9 5
1 0 5
Page
1 1 0
4
6)
5 ,5
158
5 ,5 4 4 5 4 0
1 7))
5
5 5 1 0 8 5
5 6 0 5 5 9
6)
For mounting on TH35-7,5 standard mounting rail according to EN 60715. 7 0 1 3 0 5
7)
For mounting on TH35-15 or TH75 standard mounting rail acc. to EN 607 15
SCHEMATICS
W INTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
W LSTD W LST0, LST2, LST3

R E S E T
R E S E T
S T O P
T E S T
S T O P
T E S T
1 L 1 3 L 2 5 L 3 9 5 9 7 9 5 9 7
1 L 1 3 L 2 5 L 3
2 T 1 4 T 2 6 T 3 9 6 9 8 A 2 1 4 /2 2 2 T 1 4 T 2 6 T 3 9 6 9 8
W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
W LSTD W LST0, LST2, LST3

with LSZDTE01 with LST0TE01, LST2TE01, LST3TE01
1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
95 96 97 98 A2 95 96 97 98
2T1 4T2 6T3 14/22 2T1 4T2 6T3
W PROTECTION OF DC MOTORS
Page
W 1-POLE W 2-POLE
+ + – 159
1 3 5 1 3 5
2 4 6 2 4 6
LA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS

TOP-TECHNIC
LA1 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY

WITH HAND RESET
Page
160
LA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS

LA THERMAL OVERLOAD
RELAYS FOR MINIATUR Page
POWER CONTACTORS 161
w CONTENTS
DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 166
SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 167


W LA1 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS WITH HAND RESET
LA100300

Thermal overload relays 0,12 – 0,18A LA100300
Thermal overload relays 8,0 – 11A LA100311
Thermal overload relays 10 – 14A LA100312
Page
162
W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1003.. FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS

W RELAYS WITH STANDARD TRIPPING CHARACTERISTIC FOR LA1003..
Setting Range:
Tripping time depending on the multiple of the current setting from cold condition (tolerance ±20% of the tripping time)
Type Setting Range IA / IN IA / IN IA / IN IA / IN IA / IN IA / IN
A 3 4 5 6 7,2 8
LA1003.. s s s s s s
0,12 – 0,18 18,5 10,4 7,2 5,5 4,3 3,6
0,18 – 0,27 16,7 9,8 6,5 5 4,1 3,5
0,27 – 0,4 19,4 12,1 8,2 5,9 4,9 4,2
0,4 – 0,6 18,7 11,2 8 6 4,9 4,1
0,6 – 0,9 19,7 11,6 8,1 6,1 4,9 4,2
0,8 – 1,2 22,9 13,6 10 7,3 6 5,2
1,2 – 1,8 22,2 13,2 9,2 7,6 5,8 5,3
1,8 – 2,7 23 13,7 9,3 7,6 5,7 5,1
2,7 – 4 24 14,4 9,9 7,8 5,9 5,1
4 – 6 24,7 13,8 9,9 7,3 5,6 4,8
6 – 9 22 13,4 8 5,7 4,1 3,5
8 – 11 17,4 9,2 5,9 4,1 2,9 2,3
10 – 14 26,4 12,9 7,6 5,2 3,5 2,8
W EXAMPLE OF SELECTION FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY LA1003..
Technical data of a motor

PN = 1,5 kW IN = 3,6 A IA/IN = 5 tE time = 14 s
LA100302 (2,7- 4 A)
Tripping time at 5 x IN = 9,9 s
9,9 s + 20% tolerance = 11,9 s < tE Motor = 8 s
The device is suitable.
W FUSES FOR LA1003..

Max. fuse size according to coordination-type Fuse UL SCCR3)
Type Setting Range "2" 1) "1" 1)
DOL YΔ quick slow, gL (gG) slow, gL (gG) aM Page
A A A A A A A kA
LA1003.. 0,12 – 0,18 – 0,5 2) 0,5 2) 25 - 15 5 163
0,18 – 0,27 – 1,0 2) 1,0 2) 25 - 15 5
0,27 – 0,4 – 2 2 25 - 15 5
0,4 – 0,6 – 2 2 25 - 15 5
0,6 – 0,9 – 4 4 25 - 15 5
0,8 – 1,2 – 4 4 25 2 15 5
1,2 – 1,8 – 6 6 25 2 15 5
1,8 – 2,7 – 10 10 25 4 15 5
2,7 – 4 – 16 10 25 4 15 5
4 – 6 7,5 – 10,5 20 16 25 6 15 5
6 – 9 10,5 – 15,5 35 25 35 10 25 5
8 – 11 14 – 19 35 25 35 16 30 5
10 – 14 18 – 24 50 35 63 16 40 5
1) Coordination-type according to IEC 947-4-1:

"2": Light contact welding accepted. Thermal overload relay must not be damaged.
"1": Welding of contactor and damage of the thermal overload relay allowed.
2) Miniature fuse
W TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS FOR LA1003..
Detailed tripping times for each range see table on page before.
with three-phase load with two-pole load
Tripping time Tripping time

min. s min. s
Average value of typical Typical tolerance curve
tolerance curves from from cold condition
cold condition
Proceeding from service

condition the times Proceeding from service
decrease to 20-30% of condition the times
the characteristic values decrease to 70-80% of
the characteristic values
K =Imax /Ie
K
Imax = max. phase current
F. L. C. multiplication factor Ie = max. scale value
Page
164
W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1003.. FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS


Main contacts
Rated insulation voltage Ui 1) V~ 690
operation open °C -25 to +60
storage °C -50 to +70
Trip class
according to IEC 947-4-1 10A
Cable cross-section
Main connector solid or stranded mm² 0,75-6+0,75-2,5 2)
flexible mm² 0,75-4+0,5-2,5 2)
flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-2,5+0,5-1,5
Cables per clamp number 1+1
Auxiliary connector solid mm² 0,75-2,5 2)
flexible mm² 0,5-2,5 2)
flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-1,5
Cables per clamp number 2
Auxiliary contacts
Rated insulation voltage Ui 1)
same potential V~ 690
different potential V~ 440
230V A 3
400V A 2
690V A 0,6
Rated operational current Ie 24V A 1,2
110V A 0,15
220V A 0,1
Short circuit protection (without welding 1kA)
highest fuse rating gL (gG) A 6
Power loss per current path (max.)
minimum setting value W 1,1
maximum setting value W 2,3
Page
1)
2)
Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to III, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 4kV (at 440V), 6kV (at 690V). Data for other conditions on request.
Maximum cable cross-section with prepared conductor.
165
W TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION
In case of higher ambient temperature use the following formula:

(Ambient temperature - 20) x 0,125 = correction factor in % of the full load motor current
Example:
Ambient temperature 70°C, full load motor current 7A
(70 - 20) x 0,125 = 6,25%
Setting value: 7A + 6,25% = 7,44A
DIMENSIONS
W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS LA1003..
W LA1003.. (+ CONTACTOR LA1009..)

-12
Contacor
Thermal overload relay
Page
166
SCHEMATICS
W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1

W LA1003..
manual reset
W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1

W LA1003..
Page
167
ALEA MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES UP TO 100A
BESD.... BES0....
BES2.... BES3....
Page
168
ALEA MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES UP TO 100A
ALEA MOTOR PROTECTION

SWITCHES UP TO 100A
w CONTENTS
OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................. Page 170
Page
169
ACCESSORIES ........................................................................................................ Page 188
CHARAKTERISTIC CURVES .............................................................................. Page 190
DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 191
SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 195

MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES UP TO 100A
W BES – OVERVIEW
BESD.... BES0.... BES2.... BES3....
TYPE BESD / BES0 / BES2 / BES3
APPLICATIONS
System protection ✓1)
Motor protection ✓
SIZE S00, S0, S2, S3
RATED CURRENT In
SIZE S00 up to 12A
SIZE S0 up to 25A
SIZE S2 up to 50A
SIZE S3 up to 100A
RATED OPERATIONAL VOLTAGE Ue ACCORDING TO IEC 690 VAC2)
RATED FREQUENCY 50/60 Hz
TRIP CLASS Class 10
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELEASE 0.11 ... 0.16A
up to 80 ... 100A
ELECTRONIC TRIP UNITS A multiple of the rated current 13 Times
SHORT-CIRCUIT BREAKING CAPACITY Icu at 400 VAC 50/100 kA
ACCESSORIES FOR SIZES S00 S0 S2 S3
Auxiliary switches ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Signaling switches -- ✓ ✓ ✓
Undervoltage releases ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Shunt trip units ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Insulated three-phase busbar systems ✓ ✓ ✓ --
Busbar adapters ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms -- ✓ ✓ ✓
Link modules ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Enclosures for surface mounting ✓ ✓ ✓ --
Feed terminal ✓ ✓ ✓ --
1)
For symmetrical loading of the three phases.
2)
500 V AC with moulded-plastic enclosure.
✓ Has this function or can use this accessory.
-- Does not have this function or cannot use this accessory.
Page
170
W BES – OVERVIEW
The following illustrations show our BES motor protection switches with the accessories which can be mounted for the
various sizes.
W BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZE 00, WITH MOUNTABLE ACCESSORIES
W BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZES 0, 2 OR 3, WITH MOUNTABLE ACCESSORIES
Page
171
Mountable accessories for all sizes 00 ... 3: Mountable accessories for sizes:
1. Transverse auxiliary switch 6.1. Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts 00
2. Lateral auxiliary switch with 2 contacts 6.2. Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts 0 ... 3
4. Shunt release 7. Signaling switch 0 ... 3
5. Undervoltage release
W BES – OVERVIEW
W MOUNTABLE ACCESSORIES FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES

Mounting location and function
The BES motor protection switches have three main contact elements. In order to achieve maximum flexibility, auxiliary
switches, signaling switches, auxiliary trip units and door coupling rotary operating mechanism can be supplied separately.
These components can be fitted as required on the motor protection switches without using tools.
W AUXILIARY SWITCHES, SIGNALING SWITCHES, SHUNT TRIPS AND UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASES
Front side Transverse auxiliary switches An auxiliary switch block can be inserted transversely on the front.
Notes: 1 NO + 1 NC / 2 NO The overall width of the motor protection switches remains unchanged.
• A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts
with auxiliary switches can be attached
to each motor protection switch.
Left-hand side Lateral auxiliary switches One of the two auxiliary switches can be mounted laterally for each motor protection
Notes: (2 contacts) switches The contacts of the auxiliary switch close and open together with the main
• A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts 1 NO + 1 NC / 2 NO contacts of the motor protection switches. The overall width of the lateral
with auxiliary switches can be attached auxiliary switch with 2 contacts is 9 mm.
to each motor protection switch.
• Auxiliary switches (2 contacts)
and signaling switches can be Signaling switches One signaling switch can be mounted at the side of each motor protection switches
mounted separately or together. for sizes 0, 2 and 3 with a rotary operating mechanism. The signaling switch has two contact systems.
Tripping 1 NO + 1 NC One contact system always signals tripping irrespective of whether this was caused
Short-circuit 1 NO + 1 NC by a short-circuit, an overload or an auxiliary trip unit. The other contact system only
switches in the event of a short-circuit. There is no signaling as a result of switching
off with the handle. In order to be able to switch on the motor protection switches
again after a short-circuit, the signaling switch must be reset manually after the error
cause has been eliminated. The overall width of the signaling switch is 18 mm.
Right-hand side Shunt trip units For remote-controlled tripping of the motor protection switches. The release coil
Notes: should only be energized for short periods (see schematics).
• One auxiliary trip unit can be
mounted per motor protection switch. or
Undervoltage releases Trips the motor protection switches when the voltage is interrupted and prevents the
motor from being restarted accidentally when the voltage is restored. Used for
remote-controlled tripping of the motor protection switches. Particularly suitable for
EMERGENCY-STOP disconnection by way of the corresponding EMERGENCY-STOP
pushbutton according to DIN VDE 0113.
W ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS (DOOR-COUPLING) SIZE 0 TO 3
W SCHRACK INFO
Motor protection switches with a rotary operating mechanism can be mounted in a control
cabinet and operated externally by means of a door-coupling rotary operating mechanism.
When the cabinet door with motor protection switches is closed, the operating mechanism
is coupled. When the motor protection switches closes, the coupling is locked which
prevents the door from being opened unintentionally. This interlock can be defeated by the
Page maintenance personnel. In the open position, the rotary operating mechanism can be
secured against reclosing with up to 3 padlocks. Inadvertent opening of the door is not
172 possible in this case either.
W ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS

ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISM
Rotary operating (door coupling) 0/2/3 BEZ00010
Rotary operating, emergency stop (door coupling) 0/2/3 BEZ00011
W BES – GENERAL INFORMATIONS
W SCHRACK INFO
BES motor protection switches are compact, current limiting motor protection switches which are
optimized for load feeders. The motor protection switches are used for switching and protecting
induction motors of up to 45 kW at 400 V AC and for other loads with rated currents of up to 100A.
W TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION
The motor protection switches are available in four sizes:
• Size 00 – width 45 mm, max. rated current 12 A, at 400 V AC suitable for induction motors up to 5.5 kW.
• Size 0 – width 45 mm, max. rated current 25 A, at 400 V AC suitable for induction motors up to 11 kW.
W NOTE
Technical specifications by green backgrounds. The devices with Cage Clamp terminals are on request.
W SCREW TERMINALS
BES motor protection switches of sizes 00 and 0 are fitted with terminals with captive screws and clamping pieces, allowing
the connection of 2 conductors with different cross-sections. The box terminals of the size 2 and 3 motor protection switches
also enable 2 conductors with different cross-sections to be connected. With the exception of size 3 motor protection switches
which are equipped with 4 mm Allen screws, all terminal screws are tightened with a Pozidriv screwdriver size 2. The box
terminals of the size 3 motor protection switches can be removed in order to connect conductors with cable lugs or connecting
bars. A terminal cover is available as touch protection and to ensure that the required clearances and creepage distances are
maintained if the box terminals are removed.
W BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZE 00 WITH CAGE CLAMP TERMINALS (ON REQUEST)
W SCHRACK INFO
As an alternative to screw terminals, size 00 motor protection switches are also available with Cage Clamp terminals. This
screwless connection method, already familiar from terminal blocks, clamps the conductors using a spring-loaded terminal and
is shock-proof and vibration-proof. Motor protection switches with Cage Clamp terminals allow independent connection of two
conductors per terminal.
W MOUNTING
The motor protection switches are snap-fitted an a 35 mm standard mounting rail to EN 60715. A standard mounting rail with
a height of 15 mm is required for size S3 motor protection switches. A 75 mm standard mounting rail can be used as an
alternative for size 3. Size 2 and 3 motor protection switches can also be screwed directly onto a base plate.
Page
173

When mounting the motor protection switches, the following clearances must be maintained to grounded or live parts and
to cable ducts made of molded plastic.
Motor protection switches / Distance to grounded or

circuit breakers live parts acc. to
IEC 60947-2
Type Size Ue Y X Z
Z Z X
V mm mm mm
BESD S00 up to 690 20 70 9 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
Y
BES0 S0 up to 500 30 90 9
up to 690 50 90 30 BES BES
BES2 S2 up to 690 50 140 30 BES
BES3 S3 up to 240 50 167 10

up to 440 70 167 10
Y
up to 500 110 167 10 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
up to 690 150 167 30
W INSTALLATION GUIDELINES, FUNCTION AND CONFIGURATION
W TRIP UNITS
BES motor protection switches are equipped with inverse-time delayed overload release based on the bimetal principle and
with instantaneous electronic trip units (electromagnetic shortcircuit releases). The overload releases can be adjusted in
accordance with the load current. The electronic trip units are permanently set to a value 13 times the rated current and thus
enable trouble-free starting of motors. The scale cover can be sealed to prevent unauthorized adjustments to the set current.
W TRIP CLASSES
The trip classes of thermally delayed trip units are based on the tripping time (tA) at 7.2 times the set current in cold state
(excerpt from IEC 60947-4):
• CLASS 10: 4 s < tA < 10 s
The motor protection switches must trip within this time!
W OPERATING MECHANISMS
Size 00 motor protection switches are actuated by a rocker operating mechanism and size 0, 2 and 3 motor protection
switches by a rotary operating mechanism. If the motor protection switches trips, the rotary operating mechanism switches to
the tripped position to indicate this. Before the motor protection switches is reclosed, the rotary operating mechanism must be
reset manually to the 0 position. Only then can the motor protection switches be set again to the I position. In the case of motor
protection switches with rotary operating mechanisms, an electrical signal can be output by a signaling switch to indicate that
the motor starter protector has tripped. All operating mechanisms can be locked in the 0 position with a padlock (shackle
diameter 3.5 mm to 4.5 mm). The motor protection switches isolating function complies with IEC 60947-2.
W PREVENTION OF UNINTENDED TRIPPING

In order to prevent premature tripping due to the integrated phase failure sensitivity, motor protection switches should always
be connected to ensure current flows through all three main current paths.
W SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION
If a short-circuit occurs, the short-circuit releases of BES motor protection switches isolate the faulty load feeder from the
Page
network and thus prevent further damage. Motor protection switches with a short-circuit breaking capacity of 50 kA or 100 kA
174 are virtually short-circuit resistant at a voltage of 400 V AC, since higher short-circuit currents are not to be expected in
practice.
W MOTOR PROTECTION
The tripping characteristics of BES motor protection switches are designed mainly to protect induction motors. The motor protec-
tion switches are therefore also referred to as motor circuit breakers. The rated current In of the motor to be protected is set on the
setting scale. Factory setting of the short-circuit release is 13 times the rated current of the motor protection switches. This permits
trouble-free starting and ensures that the motor is properly protected. The phase failure sensitivity of the motor protection switches
ensures that it is tripped in time in the event of a phase failure and overcurrents that occur as a result in the other phases. Motor
protection switches with thermal overload releases are normally designed in accordance with trip class 10.
W SYSTEM PROTECTION
The BES motor protection switches for motor protection are also suitable for plant protection. In order to prevent premature
tripping due to phase failure sensitivity, the three conducting paths must always be uniformly loaded. The conducting paths
must be connected in series the case of single-phase loads.
W SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION FOR STARTER COMBINATIONS

The BES motor protection switches for starter combinations in sizes 0, 2 and 3 provide short-circuit protection with the
help of a contactor and overload relay combination. Like the motor protection switches for motor protection, they are
equipped with short-circuit releases which are permanently set to a value equivalent to 13 times the rated current of the motor
protection switches. They are not equipped with overload releases. On overload, the overload relay triggers the contactor, the
motor protection switches remains closed. Only when a short-circuit occurs in the feeder does the motor protection switches
trip as well. The motor protection switches for starter combinations must always be used in combination with an overload relay
because the motor protection switches alone cannot protect the motor and itself against overload.
W MAIN AND EMERGENCY-STOP SWITCHES

The BES motor protection switches comply with the isolating function to IEC 60947-2, therefore they can be used – taking IEC
60204-1 into account – as main and EMERGENCY-STOP switches. BES door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for heavy
duty also comply with the requirements for the isolating function.
W USE OF IT SYSTEMS (IT NETWORKS)

BES motor protection switches are suitable for operation in IT systems according to IEC 60947-2. In the event of a 3-pole
short-circuit, their response in this system is the same as in others: Therefore, the same short-circuit breaking capacity Icu and
Ics applies, see "Technical specifications". An initial fault (ground fault) does not necessarily force immediate disconnection of
the network when operating IT systems. If a second independent error occurs (ground fault), the switching capacity of the
motor protection switches might be reduced. This is the case if both ground faults occur in different phases and if one of the
ground faults occurs on the input side and the other on the outgoing terminal of the motor protection switches. In order to
maintain the short-circuit function of the motor protection switches even with two independent ground faults (double
ground faults), the reduced short-circuit breaking capacity with double ground faults must be taken into account in IT systems
IcuIT (see "Technical specifications"). If a ground fault is instantaneously recognized and remedied (ground-fault monitoring),
the risk of double ground fault and thus reduced short-circuit breaking capacity IcuIT can be minimized.
W SWITCHING OF DC CURRENTS
BES motor protection switches for alternating currents are also suitable for DC switching. The maximum permissible DC
voltage per conducting path must, however, be adhered to. Higher voltages require a series connection with 2 or 3 conducting
paths. The response values of the overload release remain unchanged; the response values of a short-circuit release increase by
approximately 30 % for DC. The example circuits for DC switching can be seen in the table below.
Example circuit for size S00 to S3 BES motor protection switches
Example circuit for Maximum permitted Notes

size S00 to S3 BES DC voltage Ue
motor protection switches
L+ L 150 V DC 2-pole switching, non-grounded system1)

If there is no possibility of a ground fault, or if every ground fault is rectified immediately
(ground-fault monitoring), then the maximum permitted DC voltage can be tripled.
M
L+ L 300 V DC 2-pole switching, grounded system

The grounded pole is always assigned to the individual conducting path, so that there Page
are always 2 conducting paths in series in the event of a ground fault.
M
175
L+ L 450 V DC 1-pole switching, grounded system
3 conducting paths in series. The grounded pole is assigned to the unconnected
conducting path.
M
1)
It is assumed that this circuit always provides safe disconnection even in the event of a double ground fault that bridges two contacts.
W BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 00
W SCHRACK INFO
For mounting BESD.. onto contactor size 00 use LSZDD005 (AC-DC).
BESD0063
DESCRIPTION S.C.B.C. – I CU 1) SETTING RANGE / kW 2) SIZE ORDER NO.

ALEA MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH SIZE 00
Motor protection switch 0,16A, Class 10 100kA 0,11-0,16A / 0,04kW 00 BESD0016
Motor protection switch 10A, Class 10 50kA 7,00-10,0A / 4,00kW 00 BESD1000
Motor protection switch 12A, Class 10 50kA 9,00-12,0A / 5,50kW 00 BESD1200
1) Short-circuit breaking capacity at 400 V AC.

2) Guide value for 4-pole standard motors at 50 Hz 400 V AC. The actual starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered when
selecting the units.
Page
176
W SCHRACK INFO
For mounting BES0.. onto contactor size 0 use LSZ0D002 (AC) or LSZ0D004 (DC).
For mounting BES0.. onto contactor size 00 use LSZDD006 (AC-DC).
BES00400

Motor protection switch 0,16A, Class 10 100kA 0,11-0,16A / 0,04kW 0 BES00016
Motor protection switch 10A, Class 10 100kA 7,00-10,0A / 4,00kW 0 BES01000

Page
177
BES2....


BES3....

Motor protection switch 100A, Class 10 50kA 80,0-100A / 45,0kW 3 BES39999

Page
178
MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES – ACCESSORIES
W AUXILLIARY SWITCH
BEZ00001

AUXILLIARY SWITCH
Auxilliary switch side mounted 1 NO + 1 NC 00/0/2/3 BEZ00001
Auxilliary switch front mounted 1 NO + 1 NC 00/0/2/3 BEZ00003
Auxilliary switch side mounted 2 NO 00/0/2/3 BEZ00002
Auxilliary switch front mounted 2 NO 00/0/2/3 BEZ00004
W SIGNALING SWITCH
BEZ00005

SIGNALING SWITCH
Signaling switch 1 NO + 1 NC 0/2/3 BEZ00005
W UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASE
BEZ00006

UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASE
Undervoltage release side mounted AC 230V/50HZ, AC 240V/60HZ 00/0/2/3 BEZ00006 Page
Undervoltage release side mounted AC 400V/50HZ, AC 440V/60HZ 00/0/2/3 BEZ00007
179
W SHUNT TRIP
BEZ00009

SHUNT TRIP
Shunt trip side mounted AC 20...24V, 50/60HZ, 100% ED 00/0/2/3 BEZ00008
Shuntt trip side mounted AC 210...240V, 50/60HZ,100% ED 00/0/2/3 BEZ00009
W HOUSINGS AND LOCKING PLATE
BEZ00012

HOUSINGS
Moulded plastic housing, membran IP55 00 BEZ00012
Moulded plastic housing, emergency stop, mushroom head (yellow/red) 00 BEZ00013
Moulded plastic housing, rotary handle IP55 0 BEZ00112
Moulded plastic housing, emergency stop IP55 (yellow/red) 0 BEZ00113
Moulded plastic housing, rotary handle IP55 2 BEZ00212
Moulded plastic housing, emergency stop IP55 (yellow/red) 2 BEZ00213
LOCKING PLATE
Locking plate for 3 padlocks 00 BEZ00014
W BUSBARS
Page
180 BEZ00017

BUSBARS
3-pole busbar for 2 motor protection switches 00/0 BEZ00017
3-pole busbar for 2 motor protection switches 2 BEZ00217
3-pole busbar for 3 motor protection switches 2 BEZ00218
W COVERS FOR SPARE-PLACE
BEZ00019

COVERS FOR SPARE-PLACE
Cover for spare-place, blank plate (45 mm) 00/0 BEZ00019
Cover for spare-place, blank plate (55 mm) 2 BEZ00219
W ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS (DOOR-COUPLING)
BEZ00010

ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISM
Rotary operating (door coupling) 0/2/3 BEZ00010
Rotary operating, emergency stop (door coupling) yellow/red 0/2/3 BEZ00011
W FEED TERMINALS
BEZ00116

FEED TERMINALS
Feed Terminal Size 00 for 3-phase-busbar (25 mm 2) 00 BEZ00016
Feed Terminal Size 0 for 3-phase-busbar (25 mm )
2
0 BEZ00116 Page
Feed Terminal Size 2 for 3-phase-busbar (50 mm ) 2 BEZ00216
181
2
W BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZES 00 TO 3

Short-circuit breaking capacity Icu , Ics according to IEC 60947-2
This table shows the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu and the rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics
of the BES motor protection switches with different inception voltages dependent of the rated current In of the motor
protection switches.
Motor protection switches infeed is permissible at the upper or lower terminals without restricting the rated data. If the short-
circuit current at the place of installation exceeds the rated shortcircuit breaking capacity of the motor protection switches as
specified in the table, a back-up fuse is required. Alternatively, a motor protection switches with a limiter function can be
connected upstream.
The maximum rated current for the back-up fuse is specified in the tables. The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity
then applies as specified on the fuse.
Circuit breakers/ Rated Up to AC 240 V1) Up to AC 400 V1)/415 V2) Up to AC 440 V1)/460 V2) Up to AC 500 V1)/525 V2) Up to AC 690 V1)
Motor starter current In
protectors Icu Ics max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse
(gL/gG) (gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3)4)
Type A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A
Size 00
BESD 0.16 ... 1 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 °
1.25; 1.6 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 2 2 20
2; 2.5 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 10 10 35 2 2 35
3.2; 4 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 10 40 3 3 40 2 2 40
5; 6.3 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 10 50 3 3 50 2 2 50
8 100 100 ° 50 12.5 80 50 10 63 3 3 63 2 2 63
10 100 100 ° 50 12.5 80 10 10 63 3 3 63 2 2 63
12 100 100 ° 50 12.5 80 10 10 80 3 3 80 2 2 80
Size 0
BES0 0.16 ... 1.6 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 °
2; 2.5 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 8 8 25
3.2 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 8 8 32
4; 5 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 6 3 32
6.3 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 6 3 50
8 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 25 63 42 21 63 6 3 50
10 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 25 80 42 21 63 6 3 50
12.5 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 25 80 42 21 80 6 3 63
16 100 100 ° 50 25 100 50 10 80 10 5 80 4 2 63
20 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 10 80 10 5 80 4 2 63
22; 25 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 10 100 10 5 80 4 2 63
Size 2
BES2 16 100 100 ° 50 25 100 50 25 100 12 6 63 5 3 63
20 100 100 ° 50 25 100 50 25 100 12 6 80 5 3 63
25 100 100 ° 50 25 100 50 15 100 12 6 80 5 3 63
32 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 63
40; 45 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 63
50 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 80
Size 3
BES3 40 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 20 125 12 6 100 6 3 63
50 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 20 125 12 6 100 6 3 80
63 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 20 160 12 6 100 6 3 80
75 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 20 160 8 4 125 5 3 100
90; 100 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 20 160 8 4 125 5 3 125
Page Short-circuit resistant up to at least 50 kA

° No back-up fuse required, since short-circuit resistant up to 100 kA
182 1)
2)
10 % overvoltage.
5 % overvoltage.
3) Back-up fuse only required if the short-circuit current at the place of installation > I .
cu
4) Alternatively, fuseless limiter combinations for 690 V AC can also be used.

Short-circuit breaking capacity IcuIT in the IT system (IT network) according to IEC60947-2
BES motor protection switches are suitable for operation in IT systems. Values valid for triple-pole short-circuit are Icu up to Ics.
In case of double ground fault on different phases at the input and output side of a motor protection switches, the special
short-circuit breaking capacity IcuIT applies. The specifications in the table below apply to BES motor protection switches.
In the colored areas, IcuIT is 100 kA, or in some ranges it is 50 kA. Therefore the motor protection switches are short-circuit
resistant in these ranges.
If the short-circuit current at the place of installation exceeds the rated short-circuit breaking capacity of the motor protection
switches as specified in the table, a back-up fuse is required. The maximum rated current for the back-up fuse is specified in
the tables. The rated short-circuit breaking capacity then applies as specified on the fuse.
Motor starter Rated current Up to AC 240 V1) Up to AC 400 V1)/415 V2) Up to AC 500 V1)/525 V2) Up to AC 690 V1)
protectors In IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse
(gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3)4) (gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3)
Type A kA A kA A kA A kA A
Size 00
BESD 0.16 ... 0.63 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 100 °
0.8; 1 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 2 16
1.25; 1.6 100 ° 2 20 2 20 2 20
2; 2.5 100 ° 2 35 2 35 2 35
3.2; 4 100 ° 2 40 2 40 2 40
5; 6.3 100 ° 2 50 2 50 2 50
8; 10 50 80 2 63 2 63 2 63
12 50 80 2 80 2 80 2 80
Size 0
BES0 0.16 ... 0.63 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 100 °
0.8; 1 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 6 16
1.25; 1.6 100 ° 100 ° 8 20 6 20
2; 2.5 100 ° 8 25 8 25 6 25
3.2 100 ° 8 32 8 32 6 32
4; 5 100 ° 6 32 4 32 3 32
6.3... 10 100 ° 6 50 4 50 3 50
12.5 100 ° 6 63 4 63 3 63
16...25 50 80 4 63 3 63 2 63
Size 2
BES2 16 50 100 8 100 6 80 5 63
20 50 125 8 100 6 80 5 63
25 50 125 8 100 6 80 5 63
32 50 125 6 125 4 100 3 80
40... 50 50 160 6 125 4 100 3 80
Size 3
BES3 40 50 125 10 63 5 50 5 50
50 50 125 8 80 3 63 3 63
63 50 160 6 80 3 63 3 63
75 50 160 5 100 2 80 2 80
90; 100 50 160 5 125 2 100 2 100
Short-circuit resistant up to at least 50 kA

° No back-up fuse required, since short-circuit resistant up to 100 kA
1) 10 % overvoltage.
2) 5 % overvoltage.
3) Back-up fuse only required, if short-circuit current at the place of installation > I .
cuIT
4) Alternatively, fuseless limiter combinations for 690 V AC can also be used.
Page
183

General technical specifications
Type BESD BES0 BES2 BES3
Standards
• IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100) Yes
• IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101) Yes
• IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) Yes
• UL489, CSA C22.2-No.5-02 No
Size 00 0 2 3
Number of poles 3
Max. rated current In max (= max. rated operational current Ie) A 12 25 50 100
• Storage/transport °C –50... +80
• Operation °C –20... +702)
Permissible rated current at inside temperature of control cabinet
• +60 °C % 100
• +70 °C % 87
Motor protection switches/circuit breaker inside enclosure
Permissible rated current at ambient temperature of enclosure
• +35 °C % 100
• +60 °C % 87
Rated operational voltage Ue
• Acc. to IEC V AC 6903)
• Acc. to UL/CSA V AC 600
Rated frequency Hz 50/60
Utilization categories
• IEC 60947-2 (motor protection switches/circuit breaker) A
• IEC 60947-4-1 (motor starter) AC-3
Trip class CLASS Acc. to IEC60947-4-1 10 10 10 10
DC short-circuit breaking capacity (time constant t = 5 ms)
• 1 conducting path 150 V DC kA 10
• 2 conducting paths in series 300 V DC kA 10
• 3 conducting paths in series 450 V DC kA 10
Power loss Pv per motor starter In: ... 1.25 A W 5 --
protector/circuit breaker In: 1.6 ... 6.3 A W 6 --
Dependent on rated current In In: 8 ... 12 A W 7 --
(upper setting range) In: ... 0.63 A W -- 5 --
In: 0.8 ... 6.3 A W -- 6 --
2
Rper conducting path = P/I x 3 In: 8 ... 16 A W -- 7 --
In: 20 ... 25 A W -- 8 --
In: ... 25 A W -- 12 --
In: 32 A W 15
In: 40 ... 50 A W -- 20 --
In: ... 63 A W -- 20
In: 75 and 90 A W -- 30
In: ... 100 A W -- 38
Shock resistance Acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 25/11 (square and sine pulse)
Degree of protection Acc. to IEC 60529 IP204)
Touch protection Acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe
Temperature compensation Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 °C –20 ...+60
Phase failure sensitivity Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 Yes
Isolating function Acc. to IEC 60947-2 Yes
Main and EMERGENCY-STOP switch Acc. to IEC 60204-1 Yes
characteristics5) (VDE 0113)
Safe isolation between main and Acc. to EN 60947-1
auxiliary circuits, req. for PELV applications
Page • Up to 400 V + 10 % Yes
• Up to 415 V + 5 % (higher voltages on request) Yes
184 Permissible mounting positions Any, acc. to IEC60447 start command "I" right-hand side or top
Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 100000 50000
Electrical endurance Operating cycles 100000 25000
Max. switching frequency per hour (motor starts) 1/h 15
2) Above +60°C current reduction. 3) 500V with molded-plastic enclosure. For short-circuit breaking capacity Icu, Ics see table of same name.
4) Terminal compartment IP00. 5) With appropriate accessories.

Conductor cross-sections of main circuit
Type BESD BES0 BES2 BES3
Connection type Screw terminals Screw terminals
with box terminals
Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 Pozidriv size 2 4 mm Allen screw
Prescribed tightening torque Nm 0.8...1.2 2...2.5 3...4.5 4...6
Conductor cross-sections (1 or 2 conductors connectable)
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5... 1.5)4), 2 x (1... 2.5)4), 2 x (0.75... 16) 2 x (2.5... 16)
2 x (0.75... 2.5)4) 2 x (2.5... 6)4)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5... 1.5)4), 2 x (1... 2.5)4), 2 x (0.75... 16), 2 x (2.5... 35),
2 x (0.75... 2.5)4) 2 x (2.5... 6)4) 1 x (0.75... 25) 1 x (2.5... 50)
• Stranded mm2 2 x (0.5... 1.5)4), 1 x (1... 2.5)4), 2 x (0.75... 25), 2 x (10...50),
2 x (0.75... 2.5)4) 2 x (2.5... 6) 1 x (0.75... 35) 1 x (10...50)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18... 14) 2 x (14... 10) 2 x (18... 2), 2 x (10... 1/0),
1 x (18... 2) 1 x (10... 2/0)
Ribbon cable conductors (number x width x thickness) mm -- 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
• With copper bars2) -- -- 18 x 10
• With cable lugs3) -- -- up to 2 x 70
Connection type Cage Clamp terminals5) on request
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25... 2.5) -- --
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25... 1.5) -- --
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25... 2.5) -- --
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24... 14) -- --
Max. external diameter of the cable insulation mm 3.6
1) Cable-lug and busbar connection possible after removing the boxterminals.

2) If bars larger than 12mmx10mm are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance (on request).
3) If conductors larger than 25mm2 are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance (on request).

5) With conductor cross-sections of " 1mm2 an "insulation stop" must be used.
Page
185

Permissible rated data of devices approved for North America (UL/CSA)
motor protection switches of the BES series are approved for UL/CSA and according to UL 508 and CSA C22.2 No. 14 they
can be used on their own or as a load feeder in combination with a contactor. These motor protection switches can be used
as "Manual Motor Controllers" for "Group Installations", as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection
in Group Installations" and as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers" (Type E).
BES motor protection switches as "Manual Motor Controllers"
If used as a "Manual Motor Controller", the motor protection switches is always operated in combination with an upstream
short-circuit protection device. Approved fuses or a circuit breaker according to UL489/CSAC22.2 No. 5-02 can be used. These
devices must be dimensioned according to the National Electrical Code (UL) or Canadian Electrical Code (CSA).
Motor protection switchess hp rating1) for FLA2) Rated current 240 V AC 480 V AC 600 V AC
max. In UL CSA UL CSA UL CSA
I bc3) I bc3) I bc3) I bc3) I bc3) I bc3)
Type V 1-phase 3-phase A kA kA kA kA kA kA
Size 00
BESD 0.16 ... 2 65 65 65 65 10 10
2.5 65 65 65 65 10 10
FLA2) max. 12 A, 115 1/2 -- 3.2 65 65 65 65 10 10
600 V 200 1 1/2 3 4 65 65 65 65 10 10
NEMA size 00 230 2 3 5 65 65 65 65 10 10
460 -- 7 1/2 6.3 65 65 65 65 10 10
575/600 -- 10 8 65 65 65 65 10 10
10 65 65 65 65 10 10
12 65 65 65 65 10 10
Size 0
BES0 0.16 ... 3.2 65 65 65 65 30 30
4 65 65 65 65 30 30
FLA2) max. 25 A, 115 2 -- 5 65 65 65 65 30 30
600 V 200 3 5 6.3 65 65 65 65 30 30
NEMA size 1 230 3 7 1/2 8 65 65 65 65 30 30
460 -- 15 10 65 65 65 65 30 30
575/600 -- 20 12.5 65 65 65 65 30 30
16 65 65 65 65 10 10
20 65 65 65 65 10 10
22 65 65 65 65 10 10
25 65 65 65 65 10 10
Size 2
BES2 16 65 65 65 65 30 25
20 65 65 65 65 30 25
FLA2) max. 50 A, 115 3 -- 25 65 65 65 65 30 25
600 V 200 7 1/2 15 32 65 65 65 65 30 25
NEMA size 2 230 10 20 40 65 65 65 65 30 25
460 -- 40 45 65 65 65 65 30 25
575/600 -- 50 50 65 65 65 65 30 25
Size 3
BES3 16 65 65 65 65 30 30
20 65 65 65 65 30 30
FLA2) max. 99 A, 115 7 1/2 -- 25 65 65 65 65 30 30
600 V 200 20 30 32 65 65 65 65 30 30
NEMA size 3 230 20 40 40 65 65 65 65 30 30
460 -- 75 50 65 65 65 65 30 30
575/600 -- 100 63 65 65 65 65 30 30
75 65 65 65 65 30 30
90 65 65 65 65 10 10
100 65 65 65 65 10 10
Page
186 1)
2)
hp rating = Power rating in horse power (maximum motor rating).
FLA = Full Load Amps/Motor full load current.
3) Complies with "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL/CSA.

BES motor protection switches as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations"
The application as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations" is only available
from UL.
CSA does not recognize this approval! When the motor protection switches is used as a "Manual Motor Controller Suitable
for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations", it must always be combined with upstream short-circuit protection. As
short-circuit-protection device, approved fuses or a motor protection switches according to UL 489 can be used.These devices
must be dimensioned according to the National Electrical Code.
Motor protection switchess hp rating1) for FLA2) Rated current I n 240 V AC Up to 480 V AC Up to 600 V AC
Max. UL UL UL
I bc3) I bc3) I bc3)
Type V 1-phase 3-phase A kA kA kA
Size 00
BESD 0.16 ... 0.8 65 65 10
1 65 65 10
FLA2) max. 8 A, 115 1/3 -- 1.25 65 65 10
480 V 200 3/4 2 2 65 65 10
NEMA size 0 230 1 2 2.5 65 65 10
460 -- 5 3.2 65 65 10
575/600 -- -- 4 65 65 10
5 65 65 10
6.3 65 65 10
8 65 65 10
Size 0
BES0 0.16 ... 1.6 65 65 30
2 65 65 30
FLA2) max. 115 2 -- 2.5 65 65 30
22 A, 480 V 200 3 5 3.2 65 65 30
12.5 A, 600 V 230 3 7 1/2 4 65 65 30
460 -- 15 5 65 65 30
NEMA size 1 575/600 -- 10 6.3 65 65 30
8 65 65 30
10 65 65 30
12.5 65 65 30
Size 2
BES3 16 65 65 25
20 65 65 25
FLA2) max. 115 3 -- 25 65 65 25
50 A, 600 V 200 7 1/2 15 32 65 65 25
NEMA size 2 230 10 20 40 65 65 25
460 -- 40 45 65 65 25
575/600 -- 50 50 65 65 25
Size 3
BES4 16 65 65 30
20 65 65 30
FLA2) max. 115 7 1/2 -- 25 65 65 30
100 A, 480 V 200 20 30 32 65 65 30
75 A, 600 V 230 20 40 40 65 65 30
460 -- 75 50 65 65 30
NEMA size 3 575/600 -- 75 63 65 65 30
75 65 65 30
90 65 65 --
100 65 65 --
1) hp rating = Power rating in horse power (maximum motor rating).

2) FLA = Full Load Amps/Motor full load current. Page
3) Complies with "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL.
187
Rated data of the auxiliary switches and signaling switches
Type Lateral auxiliary Transverse auxiliary switches with
switches with
1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC
and signaling switch
Max. rated voltage
Acc. to NEMA (UL) VAC 600 250
Acc. to NEMA (CSA) VAC 600 250
Uninterrupted current A 10 2.5
Switching capacity A600 C300
Q300 R300
ACCESSORIES
W ACCESSORIES FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES

Front transverse auxiliary switches (front mounted)
Switching capacity for different voltages
1NO + 1NC, 2NO
• At AC-15, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 2
- 230 V A 0.5
- 400 V A --
- 690 V A --
• At AC-12 = Ith, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 2.5
- 230 V A 2.5
- 400 V A --
- 690 V A --
• At DC-13, direct voltage L/R 200ms
- 24 V A 1
- 48 V A 0.3
- 60 V A 0.15
- 110 V A --
- 220 V A --
Minimum load capacity V 17
mA 1
Lateral auxiliary switches and signaling switch (side mounted)
Switching capacity for different voltages
1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO and signalling switch
• At AC-15, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 6
- 230 V A 4
- 400 V A 3
- 690 V A 1
• At AC-12 = Ith, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 10
- 230 V A 10
- 400 V A 10
- 690 V A 10
• At DC, direct voltage L/R 200 ms
- 24 V A 2
- 110 V A 0.5
- 220 V A 0.25
- 440 V A 0.1
Minimum load capacity V 17
mA 1
Auxiliary trip units
Undervoltage release Shunt trip unit
Power consumption
• During pick-up
- AC voltages VA/W 20.2 / 13 20.2 / 13
- DC voltages W 20 13 ... 80
• During continuous duty
- AC voltages VA/W 7.2 / 2.4 --
- DC voltages W 2.1 --
Response voltage
• Tripping V 0.35 ... 0.7 x Us 0.7 ... 1.1 x Us
• Pickup V 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us --
Maximum opening time ms 20
Page
188
ACCESSORIES
W ACCESSORIES FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES

Short-circuit protection for auxiliary and control circuits
• Melting fuses gL/gG A 10
• Miniature circuit breaker, C characteristic A 6 Prospective short-circuit current < 0.4 kA.
Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary and control circuits
Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2
Prescribed tightening torque Nm 0.8...1.2
Conductor cross-sections (1 or 2 conductors)
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5... 1.5)1)/2 x (0.75... 2.5)1)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5... 1.5)1)/2 x (0.75... 2.5)1)
• Stranded mm2 2 x (0.5... 1.5)1)/2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
• AWG cables AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)
Connection type Cage Clamp terminals2) (on request)
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25... 1.5)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24... 14)
Max. external diameter of the cable insulation mm 3.6
2) With conductor cross-sections of ≤ 1 mm2 an "insulation stop" must be used;
Page
189
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES
W BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES – CHARACTERISTIC CURVES

The time/current characteristic, the current limiting characteristics and the I2t characteristic curves were determined
according to DIN VDE 0660 and IEC 60947. The tripping characteristic of the inverse-time delayed overload release
(thermal overload releases, 'a' releases) for DC and AC with a frequency of 0 Hz to 400 Hz applies for the time/current
characteristic.
The characteristic curves apply to the cold state; at operating temperature, the tripping times of the thermal trip units
are reduced to approximately 25 %. Under normal operating conditions, all three poles of the device must be loaded.
The three main current paths must be connected in series in order to protect single-phase or DC loads.
With 2-pole and 3-pole loading, the maximum deviation in the tripping time of 3 times the set current and upwards is
±20 % and thus in accordance with DIN VDE 0165. The tripping characteristics for the instantaneous, electromagnetic
electronic trip units (short-circuit releases, 'n' releases) are based on the rated current In that also represents the
maximum value of the setting range for motor protection switches with adjustable overload releases. If the current is set
to a lower value, the tripping current of the 'n' release is increased by a corresponding factor.
The characteristic curves of the electromagnetic electronic trip units apply to frequencies of 50 Hz/60 Hz. Appropriate
correction factors must be used for lower frequencies down to 16 2/3 Hz, for higher frequencies up to 400 Hz and for
DC.
W REPRESENTATION OF TYPICAL TIME/CURRENT CHARACTERISTIC OF BES

Opening time
10 000
100
min 5000
60
40 The above characteristic curve for the motor starter
2000
protector relates to a specific setting range. It is, however,
1000
10
500
also valid as a schematic representation of motor protection
5
switches with other current ranges. Time/current
200
2
100 characteristic curves, current limiting characteristic curves
1
50 and I2t curves are available.
3-pole
20 loading
Class 10
10
5
2-pole
2 loading
Class 10
1
0,5
0,2
0,1
0,05
0,02
0,01
0,005
0,002
0,001
0,6 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 x n
0,8
Current
Page
190
DIMENSIONS

W BESD MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 00 W BES0 MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 0
2) 1) 11) 5) 3) 4) 1) 2) 11) 5) 3) 4)
14 72 25
25
5
5
12
12
45
45
105
106
45
90
97
45
90
7)
7)
3,5
8) 8)
9 45 18 18 45 18 5 56
18 5 62 9 69
70 80
6) 76 91
3RV1 motor starter protectors, size S2

W BES2 MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 2
3RV10 31, 3RV13 31, 3RV14 31
11) 20 121 30
1) 2) 4)
3)
5
130
140
125
89
45
85
7)
8)
9 18 55 18 5 109
127
132
144
3RV1 motor starter protectors, size S3

W BES3
3RV10 MOTOR
4, 3RV13 4 PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 3
" $
& " !
!
#
$ #
%
$
#
# #
" #
'
%
& % & !
' # # !
# %
$ '
Page
1)
Side mounted auxiliary switch, 2-pole – BEZ00001,2
2)
3)
Signaling switch (S0 ... S3) side mounted – BEZ00005
Auxiliary trip unit: undervoltage release – BEZ00006,7; shunt trip – BEZ00008,9
191
4)
Front mounted auxiliary switch – BEZ00003,4
7)
Drilling pattern
8)
Standard mounting rail TH 35 according to EN 60715
9)
For mounting according to EN 60715 on TH 35 standard mounting rail, 15 mm deep, or TH 75 standard mounting rail
10)
Allen screw 4 mm
11)
Lockable in neutral position with 3.5 ... 4.5 mm shackle diameter
DIMENSIONS
W BUSBARS
W 3-PHASE BUSBAR FOR MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZES 00 AND 0, MODULAR SPACING 45 mm1)
For two motor protection switches BEZ00017
For three motor protection switches BEZ00018
For four motor protection switches BEZ00020
For five motor protection switches BEZ00021
1 3
2 1
B
4 5
8 3 Size A B
A
1 2 8
1 7 3 S00 111 67
2 1 8
S0 119 70
1)
Covers for space place (45 mm)
Size 00/0 BEZ00019
W 3-PHASE BUSBAR FOR MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZE 2, MODULAR SPACING 55 mm2)
For two motor protection switches BEZ00217
For three motor protection switches BEZ00218
15
33
33
98
55
110
168
165
2)
Covers for space place (55 mm)
Size 2 BEZ00219
Page
192
DIMENSIONS
W FEED TERMINALS
W FEED TERMINAL BEZ00016 W FEED TERMINAL BEZ00116

for motor protection switches size 00 for motor protection switches size 0
Connected from top Connected from top
4 4 2 4 4 4
1 4 1 4 5 4
2 5
2 5
7 3
1 2 2
W FEED TERMINAL BEZ00216
for motor protection switches size 2
5 5 1 1 2
3 4
9 1
1 6 1
W ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS (DOOR-COUPLING)

W BEZ00010/11
for motor protection switches size 0, 2, 3
Long shaft (with bracket) 3)
Page
193
1)
Lockable in neutral position with max. 8 mm shackle diameter.
2)
Mounted with screw cap.
3)
Supplied with a shaft length of 330 mm; can be adjusted by shortening the shaft.
5)
Grounding terminal 35 mm2 and sheet-metal bracket for shaft.
DIMENSIONS
W MOLDED-PLASTIC ENCLOSURES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING
W BEZ00012, BEZ00013 – SIZE 00

BEZ00012 with membrane, BEZ00013 with emergency stop mushroom head
for motor protection switches size 00
4 5 1 9
5 5
3 ) 1 3 c )
4 ) 4 ,5
6 )
1 4 5 ...1 4 8
8 )
7 7 ,5
9 )
b )
b d)) 1 0 0 , 5
bd)) 1 4 3
a ) 8 9
3)
Knock-outs for M25 a) 105 mm
4)
Knock-outs for rear cable entry M20 b) With EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom button: 154 mm
6)
Max. shackle diameter for padlock 8 mm Dimensions refer to mounting surface
8)
Locking plate BEZ00014 c) With EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom button: 64 mm
9)
EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom button d) Dimensions refer to mounting surface
W BEZ00112, BEZ00113 – SIZE 0 W BEZ00212, BEZ00213 – SIZE 2

BEZ00112 rotary handle, BEZ00212 rotary handle,
BEZ00113 rotary handle for emergency stop BEZ00213 rotary handle for emergency stop
for motor protection switches size 0 for motor protection switches size 2
4 5 1 9 3 2 2 9 2 5
1 ) 1 ) 2 )
2 )
3 )
4 ,5
7
1 4 5 - 1 4 8
3 )
1 5 5
2 3 5
2 5 0
1 8
a 1 2 6
a) 105 mm
Page
1)
Knock-outs for M25
194 2)
3)
Knock-outs for rear cable entry M20
Opening for padlock with shackle diameter max. 6 ... 8 mm 1 8
1 5 0 1 8 1
1)
Knock-outs for M32 (left) and M40 (right)
2)
Knock-outs for rear cable entry M32
3)
Opening for padlock with shackle diameter max. 6 ... 8 mm
SCHEMATICS
W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
Lateral auxiliary switch (side mounted) Transverse auxiliary switch (front mounted)
BEZ00001 – 1NO + 1NC BEZ00002 – 2NO BEZ00003 – 1NO + 1NC BEZ00004 – 2NO
33 41 33 43 13 21 13 23
34 42 34 44 14 22 14 24
Signaling switch
BEZ00005 – 1NO + 1NC ... overload release Undervoltage release Shunt trip
1NO + 1NC ... short circuit release BEZ00006/7 BEZ00008/9
57 65 77 85 D1 C1
v
I
v
58 66 78 86 D2 C2
BESD, BES0, BES2, BES3

L 1 L 2 L 3
1 3 5
v
2 4 6
T 1 T 2 T 3
W CONTROL DIAGRAMS
Undervoltage release Shunt trip
S0, S1, S2 OFF pushbutton in the system

Q1 Motor protection switche
S Auxiliary switch of the motor protection switch Q1
F1; F2 Fuse (gL/gG) max. 10 A
F3 Shunt trip
F4 Undervoltage releases
S
W SWITCHING EXAMPLES
BES motor protection switches with BEZ00005 signaling switch
Page
Separate "tripped" and "shortcircuit" signals: 195

S1 Signaling switch
Q1 Motor protection switche
F1 Fuse (gL/gG), max. 10 A
H1 Signal lamp "Short-circuit"
H2 Signal lamp "Overload" or "Tripping by auxiliary trip unit"
INDEX
OVERVIEW FOR: LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 –
LSDD CONTACTORS 6 3POLE 134
LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 6 LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 –
CONTACTORS AND CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 3POLE 4 4POLE 134
LSSD CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE 6 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 134
LSD0 CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE 7 LA1 MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS AC15 – 4POLE 135
LSD2 CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE 7 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 135
LSD3 CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE 7 SURGE SUPPRESSOR FOR MINIATUR CONTACTORS 135
LSS0 CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE 7 LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY, SIZE 00 149
LSD6 CONTACTORS 8 LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY, SIZE 0 149
LSDE CONTACTORS 8 LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY, SIZE 2 150
LSDG CONTACTORS 8 LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY, SIZE 3 150
LSD CONTACTORS 9 HOLDER FOR LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY 150
LSDE CONTACTORS 10 LA1 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS WITH HAND RESET 162
LSDG CONTACTORS 10 BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 00 176
LSD CONTACTORS 11 BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 0 177
LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 12 BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 2 178
LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 144 BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 3 178
BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES 170 AUXILLIARY SWITCH FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 179
SIGNALING SWITCH FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 179
GENERAL INFORMATIONS FOR: UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASE FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 179
LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3POLE 13 SHUNT TRIP FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 180
LSS CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3POLE 15 HOUSINGS AND LOCKING PLATE FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 180
LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3POLE 15 BUSBARS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 180
LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 17 COVERS FOR SPARE-PLACE FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 181
LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 146 ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 181
BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES 175 FEED TERMINALS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 181
PRODUCTS AND ORDER NUMBERS FOR: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR:

LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 00 18 LSD CONTACTORS, 3POLE, 3 ... 250 kW 33
LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 2 20 LSS CONTACTORS, 3POLE, 3 ... 250 kW 33
LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 3 20 LSDH VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3POLE, 335 ... 450 kW 71
LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 6/10/12 21 LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING RESISTIVE LOADS 79
LSD VACUUM CONTACTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 14 21 LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, 4POLE 83
LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES AC3, SIZE 00/0/2/3 22 LSS CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE 88
LSY WYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES AC3, SIZE 00/0/2 22 ACCESSORIES FOR LSD AND LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 89
LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOADS – 4POLE, SIZE 00/0 23 LSK CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS 90
LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOADS – 4POLE, SIZE 2/3 23 LA3K CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS 92
LSK CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS 24 LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 95
LA3K CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS 24 WYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 97
AUXILIARY CONTACTS FOR CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS LA3K 25 LSY COMPLETE UNITS 99
LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS AC15 – 4POLE, SIZE 00 25 MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R.. 126
AUXILIARY CONTACTS AND CONTACT BLOCKS FOR LSDD OR LSSD, SIZE 00 26 CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR MODULAR CONTACTOR
AUXILIARY CONTACTS AND CONTACT BLOCKS FOR LSDD, LSSD OR LSHD, TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R40 130
SIZE 00 26 POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MODULAR CONTACTOR
PARALLEL CONNECTORS (STAR JUMPER) AND FEED TERMINAL, SIZE 00 26 TYPES R.., K1R40 AND AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK RH11 130
WIRING SETS, MECHANICAL INTERLOCK AND CONNECTION CLIPS, SIZE 00 27 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS LA1009.. 136
WYE-DELTA TIMERS 27 MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS LA1007.. 138
CONNECTION LINKS FOR CONTACTORS AND MOTOR PROTECTION MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 139
SWITCHES, SIZE 00 27 ACCESSORY FOR MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 139
SOLDER PIN ADAPTER, SIZE 00 28 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LSTD 151
SURGE SUPRESSORS (PLUG IN TYPE), SIZE 00 28 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LST0 151
AUXILIARY CONTACTS (SNAP ON FRONT), SIZE 0-12 28 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LST2 151
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS (SNAP ON FRONT), SIZE 0-12 29 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LST3 151
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS (SIDE MOUNTED), SIZE 0-12 29 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS SIZE 00 154
MECHANICAL INTERLOCKS, SIZE 0-12 29 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS SIZE 2 155
WIRING SETS FOR REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES, SIZE 0-12 30 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS SIZE 0 154
WIRING SETS FOR YD-ASSEMBLIES AND YD-ACCESSORIES, SIZE 0-3 30 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS SIZE 3 155
CONNECTION LINKS FOR CONTACTORS AND MOTOR PROTECTION ACCESSORIES FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 156
SWITCHES, SIZE 0-3 30 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1003.. FOR MINIATUR POWER
PARALLEL CONNECTORS (STAR JUMPER) AND FEED TERMINALS, SIZE 0-12 31 CONTACTORS 163
SURGE SUPRESSORS, SIZE 0-12 31 TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS FOR LA1003.. 164
CONNECTION CLIPS FOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0-3 32 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1003.. FOR MINIATUR POWER
MECHANICAL LATCHING BLOCK, SIZE 0-2 32 CONTACTORS 165
TERMINAL COVERS, SIZE 2-14 32 BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZES 00 TO 3 182
Page BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOAD, AC OPERATED 124 ACCESSORIES FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES 188
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK FOR BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS 125
196 BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR 4-POLE, SOLENOID OPERATED, SEALABLE 125
INDEX
DIMENSIONS FOR: CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR LS CONTACTORS AND ACCESSORIES:

LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE 100 LSDD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 112
LSD2 CONTACTORS, SIZE 2 101 LSD0 CONTACTORS, SIZES 0 TO 12 112
LSDE CONTACTORS, SIZE 10 102 LSD6 CONTACTORS, SIZES 0 TO 13 112
LSDG CONTACTORS, SIZE 12 103 LSDE CONTACTORS, SIZES 0 TO 13 112
LSDH6 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14 103 LSDG CONTACTORS, SIZES 0 TO 13 112
LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14 103 LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14 112
LSRD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 104 LSDH6 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14 112
LSR0 CONTACTORS, SIZE 0 104 LSRD CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZE 00 112
LSR2 CONTACTORS, SIZE 2 104 LSR2 CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZES 0 TO 3 112
LSR3 CONTACTORS, SIZE 3 104 LSR0 CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZES 0 TO 4 112
LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 105 LSR3 CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZES 0 TO 5 112
LSHD...N, LSHD...G AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00 105 LSK CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS 112
LSKD CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 106 LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 113
LSK0 CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0 106 LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00 113
LSK3 CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 3 106 LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00 113
LA3K18.. 107 ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD WITH 1 NO INCLUDED,
LA3K24.., LA3K32.. 107 SIZE 00 113
LA3K50.., LA3K62.., LA3K74.. 107 ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS LSDD,
LA3K90.., LA3K11.. 107 LSSD WITH 1 NC INCLUDED 113
LSZDD003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 00 108 ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 113
LSZDD004 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 00 108 ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0 TO 12 114
LSZ0D003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 0 108 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4POLE, FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12 114
LSZ2D003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 0 108 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4POLE, FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12 114
LSZ00113 MECHANICAL LATCHING BLOCK 108 FIRST LATERALLY MOUNTABLE AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, 2POLE,
LSZ2D002 TERMINAL COVER FOR BOX TERMINALS, SIZE 2 108 FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12 114
LSZ3D002 TERMINAL COVER FOR BOX TERMINALS, SIZE 3 108 SECOND LATERALLY MOUNTABLE AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, 2POLE 114
LSZDH5.., LSZDD2.. 108 SURGE SUPPRESSORS FOR SIZES 00 TO 12 (CODED PLUG-IN DIRECTION) 114
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZE 00 109 POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LS CONTACTORS AND ACCESSORIES 115
LSZD0501, LSZD0510 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZE 00 AUXILIARY AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD WITH 1 NO
CONTACT BLOCK, SIZE 00 109 CONTACT 117
LSZ0D0.., LSZ0D9.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZES 0 TO 12 109 POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LS CONTACTORS AND ACCESSORIES 118
LSZ0D711, LSZ3D811 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZES 0 TO 12 109 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 119
ACCESSORIES FOR LSD CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 109 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR LSY WYE-DELTA STARTING CONTACTOR
LSWD, SIZE 00 110 ASSEMBLIES 120
LSW0, SIZE 0 110 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS 121
LSW2, SIZE 2 110 CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 140
LSW3, SIZE 3 110 POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 141
LSYD, SIZES 00 – 00 – 00 111 POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 142
LSY0, SIZES 0 – 0 – 0 111 POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR
LSY2, SIZES 2 – 2 – 0 111 MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS 142
SCREW CONNECTION LSTD SIZE 00 158
INTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 159
POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 159
PROTECTION OF DC MOTORS 159
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
LA1003.. 166
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1 FOR
MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 167
POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1 FOR
MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS 167
BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZES 00 TO 3 191
BUSBARS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES 192
3-PHASE FEED TERMINALS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES 193
ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS (DOOR-COUPLING) FOR BES MOTOR
PROTECTION SWITCHES 193
MOLDED-PLASTIC ENCLOSURES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING FOR BES MOTOR
PROTECTION SWITCHES 194
Page
197
LIST OF ARTICLES
ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE
B BESD0250 176 BZ326445 124 LA100920 134 LSD23233 20 LSDD1213 18
BES00016 177 BESD0320 176 BZ326452 124 LA100923 134 LSD23235 20 LSDD1215 18
BES00032 177 BESD0630 176 BZ326461 124 LA10094B 134 LSD24033 20 LSDD1223 18
BES00050 177 BESD1000 176 BZ326463 124 LA190101 25 LSD25030 20 LSDE225F 21
BES00063 177 BESD1200 176 BZ326464 124 LA190134 25 LSD25032 20 LSDE265F 21
BES00080 177 BEZ00001 179 BZ326465 124 LA190135 25 LSD25033 20 LSDE305F 21
BES00100 177 BEZ00002 179 BZ326466 124 LA190150 134 LSD25035 20 LSDG415F 21
BES00125 177 BEZ00003 179 BZ326467 124 LA190151 134 LSD36530 20 LSDG515F 21
BES00160 177 BEZ00004 179 BZ326468 124 LA190153 135 LSD36532 20 LSDH63G3 21
BES00400 177 BEZ00008 180 BZ326474 124 LA190158 135 LSD38030 20 LSHD0670 25
BES00800 177 BEZ00011 172 BZ326479 124 LA3K1133 24 LSD38035 20 LSHD067G 25
BES01000 177 BEZ00011 181 BZ326480 124 LA3K1813 24 LSD38050 20 LSHD067N 25
BES01200 177 BEZ00012 180 BZ326481 124 LA3K1823 24 LSD38052 20 LSHD0680 25
BES01600 177 BEZ00013 180 L LA3K2433 24 LSD39530 20 LSHD0683 25
BES02000 177 BEZ00014 180 LA100301 162 LA3K3233 24 LSD39533 20 LSHD0685 25
BES02200 177 BEZ00016 181 LA100302 162 LA3K5033 24 LSD39535 20 LSHD068G 25
BES02500 177 BEZ00017 180 LA100303 162 LA3K6233 24 LSD39553 20 LSHD068N 25
BES22500 178 BEZ00018 180 LA100304 162 LA3K7433 24 LSD6115F 21 LSHD0690 25
BES23200 178 BEZ00019 181 LA100305 162 LA3K9033 24 LSD6155F 21 LSHD0693 25
BES24000 178 BEZ00020 180 LA100306 162 LSD00930 19 LSD6195F 21 LSHD0695 25
BES24500 178 BEZ00021 180 LA100307 162 LSD00932 19 LSDD0710 18 LSHD069G 25
BES25000 178 BEZ00112 180 LA100308 162 LSD00933 19 LSDD0712 18 LSHD069N 25
BES36300 178 BEZ00113 180 LA100309 162 LSD00935 19 LSDD0713 18 LSK03213 24
BES37500 178 BEZ00116 181 LA100310 162 LSD01230 19 LSDD0715 18 LSK36213 24
BES39000 178 BEZ00212 180 LA100311 162 LSD01232 19 LSDD0720 18 LSKD17B3 24
BES39999 178 BEZ00213 180 LA100312 162 LSD01233 19 LSDD0722 18 LSR03540 23
BESD0016 176 BEZ00216 181 LA100770 135 LSD01235 19 LSDD0723 18 LSR03543 23
BESD0040 176 BZ326421 124 LA100783 135 LSD01734 19 LSDD0913 18 LSR04045 23

Page
198 BESD0200 176 BZ326444 124 LA10091B 134 LSD23232 20 LSDD1212 18 LSR31440 23
LIST OF ARTICLES
ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE
LSR31443 23 LST20800 150 LSTD0200 149 LSZ0D002 30 LSZ2W002 32 LSZD0102 27
LSR31445 23 LST21000 150 LSTD0250 149 LSZ0D003 31 LSZ2W003 32 LSZD0501 26
LSRD1840 23 LST21250 150 LSTD0320 149 LSZ0D004 30 LSZ2Y001 30 LSZD0501 26
LSRD1843 23 LST21600 150 LSTD0400 149 LSZ0D010 28 LSZ2Y002 30 LSZD0510 26
LSRD1845 23 LST22000 150 LSTD0500 149 LSZ0D104F 29 LSZ2Y003 30 LSZD0510 26
LSRD2240 23 LST22500 150 LSTD0630 149 LSZ0D113 29 LSZ2Y004 30 LSZDD001 26
LSRD2243 23 LST23200 150 LSTD0800 149 LSZ0D122 29 LSZ2Y005 31 LSZDD002 28
LSRD2245 23 LST24000 150 LSTD1000 149 LSZ0D122F 29 LSZ3D001 31 LSZDD003 26
LSS0123H 19 LST24500 150 LSTD1200 149 LSZ0D131 29 LSZ3D002 32 LSZDD004 26
LSS0173H 19 LST25000 150 LSW01233 22 LSZ0D131F 29 LSZ3D003 30 LSZDD005 27
LSS0253H 19 LST32500 150 LSW01733 22 LSZ0D140F 29 LSZ3D004 30 LSZDD006 27
LSSD071G 18 LST33200 150 LSW02533 22 LSZ0D711 29 LSZ3D811 29 LSZDD201 26
LSSD072G 18 LST34000 150 LSW23233 22 LSZ0D901 28 LSZ3TE01 150 LSZDD212 26
LSSD091G 18 LST35000 150 LSW24033 22 LSZ0D910 28 LSZ3W001 30 LSZDD213 26
LSSD092G 18 LST36300 150 LSW25033 22 LSZ0TE01 150 LSZ3W002 32 LSZDD222 26
LSSD121G 18 LST37500 150 LSW36533 22 LSZ0W001 30 LSZ3Y004 31 LSZDH522 26
LSSD122G 18 LST39000 150 LSW38033 22 LSZ0W002 29 LSZ60001 31 LSZDH531 26
LST00250 149 LST39999 150 LSW39533 22 LSZ0W003 32 LSZ6D001 32 LSZDH540 26
LST00320 149 LSTD0016 149 LSWD0733 22 LSZ0W004 32 LSZ6D002 32 LSZDW001 27
LST00400 149 LSTD0020 149 LSWD0933 22 LSZ0Y001 30 LSZ6W001 29 LSZDW002 27
LST00500 149 LSTD0025 149 LSWD1233 22 LSZ0Y002 31 LSZ6W002 30 LSZDY001 27
LST00630 149 LSTD0032 149 LSY03233 22 LSZ20001 31 LSZ6Y003 31 LSZDY002 26
LST00800 149 LSTD0040 149 LSY25033 22 LSZ2D001 32 LSZD0001 28 LSZED001 32
LST01000 149 LSTD0050 149 LSYD1733 22 LSZ2D002 32 LSZD0002 28 LSZED002 32
LST01250 149 LSTD0063 149 LSZ00001 31 LSZ2D003 31 LSZD0003 28 LSZEW001 30
LST01600 149 LSTD0080 149 LSZ00002 31 LSZ2D004 30 LSZD0004 28 LSZEY003 31
LST02000 149 LSTD0100 149 LSZ00003 31 LSZ2D005 30 LSZD0005 31 LSZGW001 30
LST02200 149 LSTD0125 149 LSZ00113 32 LSZ2TE01 150 LSZD0006 31 LSZHD001 32
LST02500 149 LSTD0160 149 LSZ0D001 28 LSZ2W001 30 LSZD0101 27
Page
199
GENERAL TERMS OF DELIVERY
General Terms of Delivery

issued by the Austrian Electrical and Electronics Industry Association
1. Scope GXUDWLRQRIVXFKFLUFXPVWDQFHVWKHVHLQFOXGHLQSDUWLFXODUDUPHGFRQÁLFWV
1.1 These General Terms shall govern legal transactions between business en- RIÀFLDOLQWHUYHQWLRQVDQGSURKLELWLRQVGHOD\VLQWUDQVSRUWRUFXVWRPVFOHDU-
terprises, namely the delivery of commodities and, mutatis mutandis, the ance, damages in transit, energy shortage and raw materials scarcity, labor
rendering of services. Software transactions are with precedence governed disputes, and default on performance by a major component supplier who is
by the Software Conditions issued by the Austrian Electrical and Electron- GLIÀFXOWWRUHSODFH7KHDIRUHVDLGFLUFXPVWDQFHVVKDOOEHGHHPHGWRSUHYDLO
ics Industry Association, assembly work by the Terms and Conditions for irrespective of whether they affect Seller or his subcontractor(s).
Assembly Work issued by the Austrian Power Current and Light Current 5.5 If a contractual penalty for default of delivery was agreed upon by contract-
Engineering Industry and/or (where applicable) the Terms and Conditions ing parties when the contract was concluded, it shall be executed as follows,
for the Assembly of Electrical Equipment used in Medicine issued by the and any deviations concerning individual items shall not affect the remain-
Austrian Electrical and Electronics Industry (the current versions are avail- ing provisions: Where delay in performance can be shown to have occurred
able at www.feei.at). solely through the fault of Seller, Buyer may claim for each completed week
1.2 Any departure from the terms and conditions mentioned in 1.1 above shall of delay an indemnity of at most one half of one per cent, a total of no more
be valid only if expressly accepted in writing by Seller. than 5 %, however, of the value of that part of the goods to be delivered
which cannot be used on account of Seller’s failure to deliver an essential
2. Submission of offers part thereof, provided the Buyer has suffered a damage to the aforesaid
2.1 Seller’s offers shall be deemed offers without engagement. extent. Assertion of rights of damages exceeding this extent is precluded.
2.2 Tender documents and project documentation must not be duplicated nor
made available to third parties without the permission of Seller. They may 6. Passage of risk and Place of performance
be claimed back at any time and shall be returned to Seller immediately if 6.1 Enjoyment and risk shall pass to Buyer at the time of departure of the goods ex
the order is placed elsewhere. works or ex warehouse regardless of the terms of quotation (such as carriage
paid, C.I.F. etc.) agreed upon. This provision also includes the case of shipment
3. Conclusion of contract being effected, organised and supervised by Seller and the case of delivery be-
7KHFRQWUDFWVKDOOEHGHHPHGFRQFOXGHGXSRQZULWWHQFRQÀUPDWLRQE\6HOOHU ing made in connection with assembly work to be undertaken by Seller.
of an order received or upon dispatch of a delivery. 6.2 For services the place of performance shall be the place at which the service
3.2 Particulars appearing in catalog, folders etc. as well as any oral or written LVUHQGHUHGWKHULVNLQUHVSHFWRIVXFKVHUYLFHVRUDQ\SDUWWKHUHRIWKDWPD\
statements shall only be binding if Seller makes express reference to them have been agreed upon shall pass to Buyer at the time the services have been
LQWKHFRQÀUPDWLRQRIWKHRUGHU rendered.
3.3 Subsequent amendments of or additions to the contract shalI be subject to
ZULWWHQFRQÀUPDWLRQ 7. Payment
7.1 Unless otherwise agreed, one third of the purchase price shall fall due at the
4. Prices WLPHRIUHFHLSWE\%X\HURIWKHRUGHUFRQÀUPDWLRQRI6HOOHURQHWKLUGDIWHU
4.1 Prices shall be quoted ex works or ex Seller’s warehouse without VAT, pack- half the delivery period has elapsed and the balance at the time of delivery.
ing and packaging, loading, disassembly, take-back and proper recycling Irrespective thereof the turnover tax comprised in the amount of the invoice
and disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment for commercial shall be paid within 30 days of the invoice date.
SXUSRVHV DV GHÀQHG E\ WKH 2UGLQDQFH 5HJXODWLQJ WKH +DQGOLQJ RI :DVWH 7.2 In the case of part settlements the individual part payments shall fall due
Electrical Equipment. Buyer shall be liable for any and all charges, taxes upon receipt of the respective invoices. The same shall apply to amounts
or other duties levied in respect of delivery. If the terms of delivery include invoiced for additional deliveries or resulting from additional agreements
transport to a destination designated by Buyer, transport costs as weIl as the beyond the scope of the original contract, irrespective of the terms of pay-
cost of any transport insurance desired by Buyer shall be borne by the latter. ment agreed upon for the principal delivery.
Delivery does not, however, include unloading and subsequent handling. 7.3 Payment shall be made without any discount free Seller’s domicile in the
Packaging materials will be taken back only by express agreement. agreed currency. Drafts and checks shaII be accepted on account of payment
4.2 Seller reserves the right to modify prices if the order placed is not in accord- only, with all interest, fees and charges in connection therewith (such as col-
ance with the offer submitted. lection and discounting charges) to be borne by Buyer.
3ULFHVDUHEDVHGRQFRVWVREWDLQLQJDWWKHWLPHRIWKHÀUVWTXRWDWLRQ,QWKH 7.4 Buyer shall not be entitled to withhold or offset payment on the grounds of
event that the costs have increased by the time of delivery, Seller shall have any warranty claims or other counterclaims.
the right to adjust prices accordingly. 7.5 Payment shall be deemed to have been effected on the date at which the
4.4 In carrying out repair orders, Seller shall provide all services deemed ex- amount in question is at Seller’s disposal.
pedient and shall charge Buyer for the same on the basis of the work input 7.6 If Buyer fails to meet the terms of payment or any other obligation arising
and/or expenditures required. The same holds for any services or additional from this or other transactions, Seller may without prejudice to his other
services the expediency of which becomes apparent only as the repair order rights
LVH[HFXWHGOQVXFKDQHYHQWVSHFLDOQRWLÀFDWLRQRI%X\HUVKDOOQRWEHUH- a) suspend performance of his own obligations until payments have been
quired. PDGHRURWKHUREOLJDWLRQVIXOÀOOHGDQGH[HUFLVHKLVULJKWWRH[WHQGWKH
4.5 Expenses for estimates of costs of repair and maintenance or for expert period of delivery to a reasonable extent,
valuations shall be invoiced to Buyer. b) call in debts arisen from this or any other transactions and charge default
interest amounting to 1.25 % per month plus turnover tax for these amounts
5. Delivery beginning with the due dates, unless Seller proves costs exceeding this.
5.1 The period allowed for delivery shall commence at the latest of the follow- In any case Seller has the right to invoice all expenses arising prior to a
ing dates: lawsuit, especially reminder charges and lawyer’s fees.
DWKHGDWHRIRUGHUFRQÀUPDWLRQE\6HOOHU 7.7 Discounts or bonuses are subject to complete payment in due time.
EWKHGDWHRIIXOÀOOPHQWE\%X\HURIDOOWKHFRQGLWLRQVWHFKQLFDOFRPPHU- 7.8 Seller retains title to all goods delivered by him until receipt of all amounts
FLDODQGRWKHUIRUZKLFKKHLVUHVSRQVLEOH invoiced including interests and charges.
c) the date of receipt by Seller of a deposit or security due before delivery of Buyer herewith assigns his claim out of a resale of conditional commodi-
the goods in question. ties, even if they are processed, transformed or combined with other com-
5.2 Buyer shall obtain whatever licences or approvals may be required from modities, to Seller to secure the latter’s purchase money claim. In the case
authorities or third parties for the construction of plant and equipment. If the of resale granting respite Buyer shall have the power of disposal of the prod-
granting of such licences or approvals is delayed for any reason the delivery uct under retention of ownership only with the proviso that upon reselling
period shall be extended accordingly. %X\HUQRWLÀHVWKHVHFRQGDU\EX\HURIWKHDVVLJQPHQWIRUVHFXULW\RUHQWHUV
5.3 Seller may carry out, and charge Buyer for, partial or advance deliveries. If the assignment in his account books. Upon request Buyer has to notify the
delivery on call is agreed upon, the commodity shall be deemed called off at assigned claim and the debtor thereof to Seller, and to make all information
the Iatest one year after the order was placed. and material required for his debt collection available and to notify the as-
5.4 In case of unforeseeable circumstances or circumstances beyond the parties signment to the third-party debtor. If the goods are attached or otherwise
control, such as all cases of force majeure, which impede compliance with levied upon, Buyer shalI draw attention to Sellers title and immediately
the agreed period of delivery, the latter shall be extended in any case for the inform Seller of the attachment or levy.
Page
200
GENERAL TERMS OF DELIVERY
8. Warranty and acceptance of obligation to repair defects 9.6 Withdrawal from contract shall have no consequences other than those stip-
2QFHWKHDJUHHGWHUPVRISD\PHQWKDYHEHHQFRPSOLHGZLWK6HOOHUVKDOO ulated above.
subject to the conditions hereunder, remedy any defect existing at the time 9.7 The assertion of claims on the ground of laesio enormis, error, or lapse of
of acceptance of the article in question whether due to faulty design, mate- purpose by the Buyer is excluded.
rial or manufacture, that impairs the functioning of said article. From par-
ticulars appearing in catalogues, folders, promotional literature as well as 10. Disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment
written or oral statements which have not been included in the agreement no 10.1 The Buyer of electrical/electronic equipment for commercial purposes, in-
warranty obligations may be deduced. FRUSRUDWHGLQ$XVWULDLVUHVSRQVLEOHIRUWKHÀQDQFLQJRIWKHFROOHFWLRQDQG
8.2 Unless special warranty periods operate for individual items the warranty WUHDWPHQW RI ZDVWH HOHFWULFDO DQG HOHFWURQLF HTXLSPHQW DV GHÀQHG E\ WKH
period shall be 12 months. These conditions shall also apply to any goods 2UGLQDQFH5HJXODWLQJWKH+DQGOLQJRI:DVWH(OHFWULFDO(TXLSPHQWLIKHLV
VXSSOLHGRUVHUYLFHVUHQGHUHGLQUHVSHFWRIJRRGVVXSSOLHGWKDWDUHÀUPO\ himself the user of the electrical/electronic equipment. If the Buyer is not
attached to buildings or the ground. The warranty period begins at the point WKHHQGXVHUKHVKDOOWUDQVIHUWKHIXOOÀQDQFLDOFRPPLWPHQWWRKLVFXVWRPHU
of passage of risk acc. to paragraph 6. by agreement and furnish proof thereof to the Seller.
8.3 The foregoing warranty obligations are conditional upon the Buyer giving 10.2 The Buyer incorporated in Austria shall ensure that the Seller is provided
immediate notice in writing of any defects that have occurred and such no- with all information necessary to meet the Seller’s obligations as manu-
tice reaching the Seller. Buyer shall prove immediately the presence of a de- IDFWXUHULPSRUWHUSDUWLFXODUO\DFFRUGLQJWRDQGRIWKH2UGLQDQFH
fect, in particular he shall make available immediately to Seller all material 5HJXODWLQJWKH+DQGOLQJRI:DVWH(OHFWULFDO(TXLSPHQWDQGWKH:DVWH0DQ-
and data in his possession. Non-observance of Buyer’s obligation to give agement Act.
immediate notice of the defect invalidates the right of claiming consequen- 10.3 The Buyer incorporated in Austria is liable vis-à-vis the Seller for any dam-
tial harm caused by a defect. Upon receipt of such notice Seller shall, in the DJH DQG RWKHU ÀQDQFLDO GLVDGYDQWDJHV LQFXUUHG E\ 6HOOHU GXH WR %X\HU·V
case of a defect covered by the warranty under 8.1 above, have the option to IDLOXUHWRPHHWRUIXOO\PHHWKLVÀQDQFLQJFRPPLWPHQWRUDQ\RWKHUREOLJD-
replace the defective goods or defective parts thereof or else to repair them tions according to Article 10. The Buyer shall bear the burden of proof of
on Buyer’s premises or have them returned for repair, or to grant a fair and performance of this obligation.
reasonable price reduction.
8.4 Any expenses incurred in connection with rectifying defects (e. g. expenses 11. Seller’s liability
for assembly and disassembly, transport, waste disposal, travel and site- 2XWVLGHWKHVFRSHRIWKH3URGXFW/LDELOLW\$FW6HOOHUVKDOOEHOLDEOHRQO\LI
to-quarters time) shall be borne by Buyer. For warranty work on Buyer’s the damage in question is proved to be due to intentional acts or acts of gross
premises Buyer shall make available free of charge any assistance, hoisting negligence, within the limits of statutory provisions. Seller shall not be li-
gear, scaffolding and sundry supplies and incidentals that may he required. able for damage due to acts of ordinary negligence nor for consequential
5HSODFHGSDUWVVKDOOEHFRPHWKHSURSHUW\RI6HOOHU GDPDJHVRUGDPDJHVIRUSXUHHFRQRPLFORVVORVVRISURÀWVORVVRIVDYLQJV
8.5 If an article is manufactured by Seller on the basis of design data, design or interest or damage resulting from third-party claims against buyer.
GUDZLQJV PRGHOV RU RWKHU VSHFLÀFDWLRQV VXSSOLHG E\ %X\HU 6HOOHU·V ZDU- 11.2 Seller shall not be liable for damages in case of non-compliance with in-
UDQW\VKDOOEHUHVWULFWHGWRQRQFRPSOLDQFHZLWK%X\HUVVSHFLÀFDWLRQV structions for assembly, commissioning and operation (such as are contained
8.6 Seller’s warranty obligation shall not extend to any defects due to assembly in instructions for use) or non-compliance with licensing requirements.
and installation work not undertaken by Seller, inadequate equipment, or 11.3 Claims that exceed the contractual penalties that were agreed on are ex-
due to non-compliance with installation requirements and operating concluded from the respective title.
ditions, overloading of parts in excess of the design values stipulated by
Seller, negligent or faulty handling or the use of inappropriate materials, nor 12. Industrial property rights and copyrights
for defects attributable to material supplied by Buyer. Nor shall Seller be li- 12.1 Buyer shall indemnify Seller and hold him harmless against any claims for
able for damage due to acts of third parties, atmospheric discharges. Excess any infringement of industrial property rights raised against him if Seller
YROWDJHDQGFKHPLFDOLQÁXHQFHV7KHZDUUDQW\GRHVQRWFRYHUWKHUHSODFH- manufactures an article pursuant to any design data, design drawings, mod-
ment of parts subject to natural wear and tear. Seller accepts no warranty for HOVRURWKHUVSHFLÀFDWLRQVPDGHDYDLODEOHWRKLPE\%X\HU
the sale of used goods. 'HVLJQGRFXPHQWVVXFKDVSODQVDQGGUDZLQJVDQGRWKHUWHFKQLFDOVSHFLÀ-
8.7 The warranty shall lapse immediately if, without written consent of Seller, cations as well as samples, catalogues, prospectuses, pictures and the like
%X\HUKLPVHOIRUDWKLUGSDUW\QRWH[SUHVVO\DXWKRULVHGXQGHUWDNHVPRGLÀFD- shall remain the intellectual property of Seller and are subject to the relevant
tions or repairs on any items delivered. statutory provisions governing reproduction, imitation, competition etc. The
8.8 Claims acc. to § 933b ABGB are struck by the statute of limitation with provisions of 22 above shall also cover design documents.
lapse of the period mentioned under point 8.2.
8.9 The provisions of sub-paragraphs 8.1 to 8.7 shall apply, mutatis mutandis, to 13. General
all cases where the obligation to repair defects has to be accepted for other Should individual provisions of the contract or of these provisions be invalid
reasons laid down by law. the validity of the other provisions shall not be affected. The invalid provi-
sion shall be replaced by a valid one, which comes as close to the target goal
9. Withdrawal from contract as possible.
9.1 Buyer may withdraw from the contract only in the event of delays caused by
gross negligence on the part of Seller and only after a reasonable period of 14. Jurisdiction and applicable law
JUDFHKDVHODSVHG:LWKGUDZDOIURPFRQWUDFWVKDOOEHQRWLÀHGLQZULWLQJE\ Any litigations arising under the contract including litigations over the ex-
registered mail. istence or non-existence thereof shall fall within the exclusive jurisdiction
9.2 Irrespective of his other rights Seller shall be entitled to withdraw from the RIWKHFRPSHWHQWFRXUWDW6HOOHUVGRPLFLOHWKHFRPSHWHQWFRXUWRIWKH%H]-
contract irksgericht Innere Stadt, Vienna, shall have exclusive jurisdiction if Seller
a) if the execution of delivery or the inception or continuation of services to is domiciled in Vienna. The contract is subject to Austrian law excluding
be rendered under the contract is made impossible for reasons within the the referral rules. Application of the UN Convention on Contracts for the
responsibility of Buyer and if the delay is extended beyond a reasonable lnternational Sale of Goods is renounced.
SHULRGRIJUDFHDOORZHG
b) if doubts have arisen as to Buyer’s creditworthiness and if same fails, Last revised in May 2007
on Seller’s request, to make an advance payment or to provide adequate
security prior to delivery, or
c) if, for reasons mentioned in 5.4, the period allowed for delivery is ex-
tended by more than half of the period originally agreed or by at least 6
months.
9.3 For the reasons given above withdrawal from the contract shall also be possi-
ble in respect of any outstanding part of the delivery or service contracted for.
9.4 If bankruptcy proceedings are instituted against any contracting party or
an application for bankruptcy proceedings against that party is not granted
IRULQVXIÀFLHQF\RIDVVHWVWKHRWKHUSDUW\PD\ZLWKGUDZIURPWKHFRQWUDFW
without allowing a period of grace.
9.5 Without prejudice to Seller’s claim for damages including expenses aris-
ing prior to a lawsuit, upon withdrawal from contract any open accounts in
respect of deliveries made or services rendered in whole or in part shall be
settled according to contract This provision also covers deliveries or serv-
ices not yet accepted by Buyer as weIl as any preparatory acts performed
by Seller. Seller shall, however, have the option alternatively to require the
restitution of articles already delivered.
CONNECTING COMPETENCE.
THE COMPANY
HEADQUARTERS
SCHRACK TECHNIK GMBH
Seybelgasse 13, A-1230 Vienna
PHONE +43(0)1/866 85-5900
FAX +43(0)1/866 85-98804
E-MAIL export@schrack.com
SCHRACK COMPANIES
BELGIUM POLAND SLOVENIA

SCHRACK TECHNIK B.V.B.A SCHRACK TECHNIK POLSKA SP.Z.O.O. SCHRACK TECHNIK D.O.O.
Twaalfapostelenstraat 14 ul. Staniewicka 5 Pameče 175
BE-9051 St-Denijs-Westrem PL-03-310 Warszawa SLO-2380 Slovenj Gradec
PHONE +32 9/384 79 92 PHONE +48 22/331 48 31 PHONE +38 6/2 883 92 00
FAX +32 9/384 87 69 FAX +48 22/331 48 33 FAX +38 6/2 884 34 71
E-MAIL info@schrack.be E-MAIL se@schrack.pl E-MAIL schrack.sg@schrack.si
BOSNIEN-HERZEGOWINA ROMANIA CZECH REPUBLIC

SCHRACK TECHNIK BH D.O.O. SCHRACK TECHNIK SRL SCHRACK TECHNIK SPOL. SR.O.
Put za aluminijski kombinat bb Str. Simion Barnutiu nr. 15 Dolnomecholupska 2
BH-88000 Mostar RO-410204 Oradea CZ-10200 Praha 10 – Hostivar
PHONE +387/36 333 666 PHONE +40 259/435 887 PHONE +42(0)2/810 08 264
FAX +387/36 333 667 FAX +40 259/412 892 FAX +42(0)2/810 08 462
E-MAIL mostar@schrack.ba E-MAIL schrack@schrack.ro E-MAIL praha@schrack.cz
BULGARIEN SERBIA HUNGARY

SCHRACK TECHNIK EOOD SCHRACK TECHNIK D.O.O. SCHRACK TECHNIK KFT.
Prof. Tsvetan Lazarov 162 Kumodraska 260 Vidor u. 5
Druzhba - 2 RS-11000 Beograd H-1172 Budapest
BG-1000 Sofia PHONE +38 1/11 309 2600 PHONE +36 1/253 14 01
PHONE +359/(2) 890 790 FAX +38 1/11 309 2620 FAX +36 1/253 14 91
E-MAIL sofia@schrack.bg E-MAIL office@schrack.co.yu E-MAIL schrack@schrack.hu
CROATIA SLOVAKIA
SCHRACK TECHNIK D.O.O. SCHRACK TECHNIK SPOL. SR.O.
Zavrtnica 17 Langsfeldova 2
HR-10000 Zagreb SK-03601 Martin
PHONE +385 1/605 55 00 PHONE +42 1/43 422 16 41
FAX +385 1/605 55 66 FAX +42 1/43 423 95 56
E-MAIL schrack@schrack.hr E-MAIL martin@schrack.sk
K-ALEA-EN9 WWW.SCHRACK.COM

Catalog

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Catalog

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

CONNECTING COMPETENCE.

W POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

ENERGY INDUSTRY BUILDINGS SAFETY DATA CABLE LIGHT

W WELCOME TO SCHRACK TECHNIK

W SCHRACK PRODUCT QUALITY

w ALEA POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

w LA MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

w ALEA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS

w LA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS

w ALEA MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES UP TO 100A

ALEA POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

LSHD / LSHD-PLC LSDD / LSSD-PLC

LSD0 / LSS0-PLC LSD2 / LSD3 / LSD6

LSDE / LSDG LSDH

ALEA POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

ALEA POWER AND

OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................. Page 4

GENERAL INFORMATIONS ............................................................................ Page 13

PRODUCTS AND ORDER NUMBERS ........................................................ Page 18

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................... Page 33

DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 100

SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 112

POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W CONTACTORS AND CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 3-POLE – OVERVIEW

LSHD / LSHD-PLC 1) LSDD / LSSD-PLC 1) LSD0 / LSS0-PLC LSD2

MOTOR STARTER PROTECTORS (PROTECTION EQUIPMENT: MOTOR STARTER PROTECTORS)

1) no auxillary contacts for PLC-use types possible

POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W CONTACTORS AND CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 3-POLE – OVERVIEW

LSD3 LSD6 LSDE LSDG LSDH

LSZ0D... LSZ0D... LSZ0D... LSZ0D... --

LST3 25 ... 100 A -- -- -- --

BES3 63 ... 100 A -- -- -- --

LSZ3D004 (AC), LSZ3D003 (DC)

LSW365.. LSW380.. LSW395.. -- -- -- --

POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W LSDD CONTACTORS, LSSD CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE AND

1. Contactor LSDD For contactors LSDD

POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W LSD0, LSD2, LSD3 AND LSS0 CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE – OVERVIEW

W SIZES 0 TO 3 WITH MOUNTABLE ACCESSORIES Page

For sizes 0 to 3: Only for sizes 2 and 3:

POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W LSD6, LSDE AND LSDG CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW

Page W SIZES 6 TO 12 WITH ACCESSORIES

POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W LSD CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW

W LSW CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES, LSD CONTACTORS SIZE 6 WITH ACCESSORIES Page

1. LSD contactors, size 6 Accessories identical for sizes 6 to 12

POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W LSDE AND LSDG CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW

1. LSD contactors, sizes 10 and 12 or LSD Accessories identical for sizes 6 to 12

POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W LSD CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW

W LSD CONTACTORS SIZES 6 TO 12 WITH ACCESSORIES Page

1. LSD6, LSDE, LSDG contactors, sizes 6, 10 and 12 Identical for sizes 6 to 12

POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW

W AUXILIARY CONTACTORS SIZE 00, WITH ACCESSORIES

POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3-POLE, 3 ... 250 kW –

SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION OF THE CONTACTORS

RATINGS OF INDUCTION MOTORS